FANUC 0-Mate PDF

FANUC Series 0 / 00 / 0-Mate
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
B-61397E/02
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.
1
Reset button Data input keys
Program edit keys
Input key
5
Page change Output/Start key keys Function keys Cursor move keys
7
Reset key Data input keys
8
Program edit keys
Input key
10
Page change keys Cursor move keys
Function keys Shift key
Output/Start key
1. CRT/MDI PANEL
1.3 CRT/MDI with MMC
POWER
I+OFF O+OFF
MMC/CNC change key Reset key Shift key
RESET
MMC/ CNC
SHIFT
OUTPUT START
Start/output key
/ .
A .
B .
C .
D $
E %
F &
G .
N SP
O >
P .
R <
S >
T [
U ]
V .{
W }
X :
Y ;
Z .
EOB
4
7 8 9 ALTER 4 . 5 6 INSRT
Program edit keys
3 .
DELET
:.
0 .
. .
INPUT
Input key
POS
PRGRM
MENU OFSET
CAN
DGNOS PARAM
OPR ALARM
AUX GRAPH
FUNC
6
Function keys
10
1. CRT/MDI PANEL
1.4
D
MDI Keyboard
Standard MDI keyboards (T series)
Full MDI keyboards (T series)
Standard MDI keyboards (M series)
Full MDI keyboards (M series)
10
1. CRT/MDI PANEL
D Full MDI keyboards (14 CRT for M series)
MDI keyboards with MMC
10
1. CRT/MDI PANEL
1.5 Explanation of the Keyboard
Name
Power ON and OFF buttons
Number
1
Explanation
Press these buttons to turn CNC power ON and OFF.
f OFF 2 RESET key
| ON Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
RESET
START key
OUTPT START
This key is used to start MDI operation or automatic operation, depending on the machine. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. This key is also used to output data to an input/output device. The soft keys have various functions, according to the applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. Soft key of left edge : Return menu key Soft key of right edge :
Soft keys (option)
Continuous menu key 5 Address and numeric keys Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
N
6
4
Some keys have two characters on their keytop. Pressing the <SHIFT> key switches the characters. Special character is displayed on the screen when a character indicated at the bottom right corner on the keytop can be entered. When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the data is input to the buffer, and it is displayed on the CRT screen. To copy the data in the key input buffer to the offset register, etc., press the
INPUT
SHIFT key
SHIFT
(Full MDI keyboard) 7 INPUT key

INPUT
key.
This key is also used to input data from an input/output device.
Number
8
Name
Cancel key
Explanation
Press this key to delete the input data or the last character in the key input buffer.
CAN
Program edit keys
Press these keys when editing the program.

DELET
ALTER
ALTER
INSRT
: Alteration
3
INSRT
: Insertion
DELET
: Deletion
10
Function keys
Press these keys to switch display screens for each function.
POS
PRGRM
There are two different cursor move keys. : This key is used to move the cursor in an upward or reverse direction. : This key is used to move the cursor in a downward or forward direction.
11
Cursor move keys
CURSOR
12
Page change keys
Two kinds of page change keys are available. : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the reverse direction. : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward direction.
PAGE
13
MMC/CNC change key MMC/ CNC
Selects whether the MMC screen or CNC screen is displayed on the CRT.
10
10
1. CRT/MDI PANEL
1.6
D
Key Input
For standard MDI keyboard
On the standard MDI keyboard, the same key is used to input both an address and a numeric value. When ADRS. is displayed on the top of the key input buffer, addresses can be input. When NUM. is displayed on the top of the key input buffer, numeric values can be input. ADRS. [ ][ ] [ NUM. X ][ ]
Press
4 X
key
Press
4 X
key
NUM. X [ ][ ] [
NUM. X 4 ][ ]
The following keys are used for inputting multiple addresses. They may be not displayed on the screen depending on the options used. T series B A C K I Y H
J NO. Q V P
M series D B K J I
L NO. P Q
4th
4th
11
For full MDI keyboard
A < is displayed at the end of the key input buffer indicating the input position of the next character.
Key input buffer display
2
N001X100Z< [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
3
Key input buffer display To input the symbol indicated at the lower part of a key top, press the key to change the prompt < to . Then press the key.
SHIFT
10
12
2. CRT/MDI OPERATION
2.1 Screen Transition Triggered by the Each Function Key
Screen transition triggered by the function key
POSITION DISPLAY SCREEN
POS
POS
Current position screen
ABS
REL
ALL
HNDL
Position display of absolute coordinate system
Position displays of relative coordinate system
Total position display of each coordinate system Display of run time and parts count
Manual handle interruption
Display of run time and parts count Display of actual speed
Display of run time and parts count
Display of run time and parts count Display of actual speed
Display of actual speed
Display of actual speed
Setting of relative coordinate values
Display of distance to go
Display of distance to go
13
PROGRAM SCREEN
Screen transition triggered by the function key in the AUTO or MDI mode
PRGRM
PRGRM
2
Program screen AUTO (MDI)*1 PRGRM CURRNT NEXT CHECK (MDI)*1 RSTR
3
Program restart
Display of program contents
Display of current block and modal data
Display of current block and next block
Display of program number and sequence number Program being executed Absolute / relative coordinate value Distance to go Modal values
*1 *2
4
Command for MDI operation
*1
Displayed in MDI mode Not displayed in MDI mode
Program screen AUTO BGEDT FL.SDL *2
[SCHDUL] Back ground editing screen Setting of schedule
10
14
PROGRAM SCREEN
Screen transition triggered by the function key in the EDIT mode
PRGRM
PRGRM
Program screen
*1
EDIT C.A.P.
PRGRM
LIB
FLOPPY I/O *2
*1
Program editing screen
Display of program directory on CNC memory Condense of CNC memory
Display of program directory on floppy cassette
Conversational programming screen
*1 Displayed if the Floppy Cassette is specified as the input/output unit *2 Displayed if the above conditions are not satisfied
Program screen EDIT BGEDT EXEDT
Back ground editing screen
Extended part program editing
15
OFFSET SCREEN
Screen transition triggered by the function key (M series)

MENU OFSET
MENU OFSET
2
Tool offset value OFFSET MACRO MENU WORK TOOLLF
Display of tool offset value
Display of custom macro variables
Display of pattern menu
Display of workpiece zero point offset value
Display of tool life management data
Setting of tool offset value
Setting of macro variables
Setting of pattern data
Setting of workpiece zero point offset value
Preset of tool life counter
Tool length measurement
Tool offset value WORK48
Display of the additional workpiece zero point offset value
Setting of the additional workpiece zero point offset value
10
16
OFFSET SCREEN
Screen transition triggered by the function key (T series)

MENU OFSET
MENU OFSET
Tool offset value WEAR OFFSET

Display tool wear offset value
GEOM
W.SHFT WORK
Display work shift or workpiece zero point offset value
MACRO
Display tool geometry offset value
Display macro variables
Set tool wear offset value Tool length measurement
Set tool geometry offset value
Set work shift or workpiece zero point offset value
Set macro variables
Tool offset value TOOLLF WEAR GEOM
Display tool life management data
Display Yaxis tool wear offset value
Display Yaxis tool geometry offset value
Preset tool life management data
Set Yaxis tool wear offset value
Set Yaxis tool geometry offset value
17
PARAMETER/DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN
DGNOS PARAM
DGNOS PARAM
2
Parameter screen
*
PARAM
DGNOS
SVPRM
3
Display of parameter screen Display of diagnosis screen Display of servo setting screen
Setting of parameter Setting of pitch error compensation data
Display of servo tuning screen
Display of setting data
5
*
Setting of setting data Setting of sequence number comparison and stop Setting of parts count
The servo setting/tuning screen can be suppressed if bit 0 of parameter 0389 is specified accordingly.
Display of run time, parts count
Display of date and clock
Setting of date and clock
10
18
ALARM SCREEN

OPR
ALARM
OPR
ALARM
Alarm screen
ALARM
OPR
MSG
Display of alarm screen
Display of software operators panel general purpose switch
Display of operators message
Setting of software operators panel general purpose switch
19
2.2
CRT/MDI Operation
Command display
D Function button
PRGRM
During the AUTO mode, press
(page) or the corresponding soft
key to cause any of the following four types of displays to appear. (1) A program being currently executed is displayed.
PRGRM PROGRAM O2000 ; N100 G92 X0 Y0 Z50. ; N110 G91 G00 Y50. ; N120 Z50. ; N130 G41 G17 H1 G01 X20. F3000 ; N140 G02 J25.5 ; N150 X20. ; N160 G02 X12.5 Y12.5 R12.5 ; N170 G01 Y40. ; N180 X30. Y30. ; N190 G40 X50. ; O2000 N0130
PAGE
S 0T 16:59:40 BUF AUTO [ PRGRM ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ CHECK ] [ RSTR ]
The cursor is set to the beginning of the program being executed. PAGE (2) The command currently being executed and the modal values specified before are displayed.
PROGRAM (CURRNT) X 20.000 F 3000 H 1 G67 G54 G64 G69 G15 G25 O2000 N00130 (MODAL) G01 F 3000 G17 R G91 P G22 Q G94 H G21 M G41 S G41 G49 T G80 G80 G98 S G50 S 0 T0000 02:50:52 BUF AUTO [ PRGRM ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ CHECK ] [ RSTR ] G01 G17
PAGE
(3) The command currently being executed and the next command to be executed are displayed.
PROGRAM (CURRNT) G01 G17 X F H 20.000 3000 1 (NEXT) J G02 25.500 O2000 N0130
G41 G80 G80
S 0 T 02:52:14 BUF AUTO [ PRGRM ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ CHECK ] [ RSTR ]
PAGE
(4) Program check The block currently being executed, the current position, and the modal values specified before are displayed.
PROGRAM CHECK O2000 N0130
10
N130 G41 G17 H1 G01 X20. F3000 ; N140 G02 J25.5 ; N150 X20.0 ; N160 G02 X12.5 Y12.5 R12.5 ; (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO) ( G) X 17.600 X 2.400 G01 G21 G50 Y 50.000 Y 0.000 G17 G41 G67 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 G91 G49 G54 G22 G80 G64 G94 G98 G69 F 3000 P H 1 S R Q M T ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 02:53:16 BUF AUTO [ PRGRM ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ CHECK ] [ RSTR ]
* Besides the above displays, the program restart screen is displayed in some cases. (Option)
20
Program display
D Function button
PRGRM
During the EDIT mode, press the
PRGRM
key several times or the
corresponding soft key to cause either of the following two types of displays to appear. (1) The program is displayed.
PRGRM PROGRM O0100 ; N10 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N20 G00 Z10. Y50. ; N30 G01 X200. Y60. F500 T12 ; N40 % O0100 N0040
<
S 0 T 10:39:27 EDIT [ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ FLOPPY ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ]
The program and sequence numbers are displayed at the upper right section of the screen. (2) The amount of program memory in use is displayed.
PRGRM PROGRAM O1224 N0000
SYSTEM EDITION 0466 25 PROGRAM NO. USED : 14 FREE : 49 MEMORY AREA USED : 275 FREE : 3820 PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST O0010 O2000 O0020 O0030 O0200 O0300 O0555 O1200 O0777 O1234 O0040 O0050 O1969 O1224
> 03:04:17 [ PRGRM ] [ CONDNS ] [
S 0 T ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ]
D Number of registered programs D Memory area in use D Program list * If the directory display of floppy cassette is provided, a file list, in addition to the above displays, appears on the screen.
Reset
Press the When the
RESET
. This key is usually used to reset the alarm. is pressed, the NC enters one of the states listed below. After a reset
The tool decelerates and stops. The unexecuted amount of movement disappears. A sendout sequence is terminated. Refer to the machine tool builders manual for what occurs on the machine side. The contents of the buffer are not erased. The contents of the buffer are erased. The BUF display disappears.
RESET
Before a reset
A tool movement command continues to be executed. An M, S, or T continues to be sent out. When the buffer is l d d with loaded ith one block MDI mode Other modes
In any case, pressing the mode,

RESET
RESET
resets the NC. In a mode other than the MDI
causes the labels to be skipped.
21
Custom macro variable display/setting

D Function button Press the
MENU OFSET MENU OFSET
key several times or the corresponding soft key to
select the desired screen.

MENU OFSET MENU OFSET VARIABLE NO. 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 DATA 123.456 0.000 NO. 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 O1234 N1234 DATA
PAGE
Y 0.000 B 0.000 MDI [OFFSET ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ WORK ] [
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Z 0.000
3
]
4
CURSOR If a variable is null, the corresponding value field is left blank. If the absolute value is greater than 99999999, the corresponding value field contains ********.
Numeral
INPUT
6
Tool compensation value display/setting
MENU OFSET MENU OFSET OFFSET O1224 N0000 NO. DATA NO. DATA 001 009 0.000 002 0.000 010 12.269 003 5.000 011 10.230 004 0.000 012 11.265 005 12.580 013 8.562 006 0.000 014 0.000 007 0.000 015 0.000 008 0.000 016 0.000 ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 NO. 013 = S 0 T 03:22:13 MDI [ OFFSET ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ WORK ] [ TOOLLF ]
PAGE
CURSOR
Move the cursor to the target offset number using the cursor keys. Or press the keys as shown below:
No.
Offset number
INPUT
10
Offset amount
INPUT
22
Alarm display
ALARM MESSAGE O0000 N0000
100P/S ALARM 417SERVO ALARM : X AXIS DGTL PARAM 427SERVO ALARM : Y AXIS DGTL PARAM OPR ALARM
S NOT READY ALARM [ ALARM ] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ MDI ] [
0T ]
Software operators panel display/setting

Press the
OPR ALARM
key several times or the corresponding soft key to select
the target screen.

OPR ALARM OPR ALARM OPERATORS PANEL MODE : MDI AUTO HANDLE AXIS : HANDLE MULT. : RAPID OVRD. : JOG FEED O1224 N0000
PAGE
EDIT HNDL JOG ZRN HX HY HZ *1 *10 *100 100% 50% 25% F0 : 500 MM/MIN ************** FEED OVRD. : 100% ****** ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 S 03:59:30 MDI [ ALARM ] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ ] [ 0 T ]
OPERATORS PANEL
O1224 N0000 JOFF OFF OFF OFF PROTECT JOFF 0.000 ON JON JON JON JRELEASE ON
Set
PAGE
BLOCK SKIP SINGLE BLOCK MACHINE LOCK DRY RUN PROTECT KEY FEED HOLD
: : : : : :
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) X 0.000 Y Z 0.000
CURSOR or
CURSOR
S 0 T 04:00:18 [ ALARM ] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ MDI ] [ ]
4th B
or
K J I
The switches and controls on the CRT/MDI panel can be used in place of the counterparts on the machine operators panel. (FANUC MPC is required.) D Use the buttons shown below for jog feed operations.
8 N 4 X 1 H 5 Y 2 F
9 G 6 Z
23
2.3
CRT/MDI Operation and Display (M Series)
Current position display

D Function button
POS
Press
(page) or the corresponding soft key to cause any of the (1) Absolute coordinates Distance from the programmed zero point
POS
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
following three types of displays to appear.
O0010 N0000 X 123.456 Y 363.233 Z 0.000

RUN TIME ACT.F 01:35:22 [ ABS ] 0H 1M 3000 MM/M PART COUNT 1 CYCLE TIME 0H 1M33S S 0 T BUF AUTO [ HNDL ] [ ]
[ REL ]
[ ALL ]
(2) Relative coordinates Any tool position can be set to 0 by

CAN
. This holds true also of Y and Z.

ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
O0010 N0000 X 123.456 Y 363.233 Z 0.000

RUN TIME ACT.F 01:36:12 [ ABS ] 0H 1M 3000 MM/M PART COUNT 1 CYCLE TIME 0H 1M33S S 0 T BUF AUTO [ HNDL ] [ ]
[ REL ]
[ ALL ]
(3) General coordinates
Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates Machine coordinates

O1000 N00010 (ABSOLUTE) X 123.456 Y 456.890 Z 789.123 (DISTANCE TO GO) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 PART COUNT 1 CYCLE TIME 0H 1M38S S 0 T MDI
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) X 246.912 Y 913.780 Z 1578.246 (MACHINE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 RUN TIME 0H 4M ACT.F 0 MM/M 01:54:57 [ ABS ] [ REL ]
[ ALL ]
[ HNDL ]
The target screen can be selected directly by the corresponding soft key. The operating time and parts count are displayed. Two types of operating time and parts count are displayed on the coordinate display screen. (position)
10
24
Setting data display/setting
D Function button
DGNOS PARAM
(Parameter pages 1 and 2 are the setting data screens.) When the title parameter is not on the screen, press the
DGNOS PARAM
PARAMETER (SETTING 1) _REVX = REVY = TVON = ISO = INCH = I/O = ABS = SEQ = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O1224 N0000
key or
(0:EIA (0:MM (0:INC
1:ISO) 1:INCH) 1:ABS) CLOCK 10/01/10 03:30:18
the corresponding soft key to select the parameter screen.
NO. REVX = 03:30:09 [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [
S 0 T MDI ] [ SVPRM ] [ ]
(page) [Setting] MDI mode

PARAMETER O1224 N0000 (SETTING 2) _PWE = 1 (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE) REV4 = 0 TAPEF = 0 (SEQUENCE STOP) PRGNO = 0 SEQNO = 0 PART TOTAL PART REQUIRED PART COUNT RUN TIME NO. PWE = 03:35:07 [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ = 17 = 50 = 17 OH 4M CYCLE TIME OH OM 2S S MDI ] [ SVPRM ] [ ] 0 T
or CURSOR CURSOR
Numeral
INPUT
Display Item
REVX REVY TVON ISO INCH I/O (Note) ABS SEQ
0
Xaxis mirror image OFF Yaxis mirror image OFF No TV check is made. EIA code output (during punch) Metric input
1
Xaxis mirror image ON Yaxis mirror image ON A TV check is made. ISO code output (during punch) Inch input
Reader/punch interface channel is selected. Incremental command (MDI mode) Sequence numbers are not inserted automatically when a program is entered from the MDI. Parameter writing is disabled. Fourthaxis mirror image OFF F10/11 table format is not used Absolute mode) command (MDI
Sequence numbers are inserted automatically when a program is entered from the MDI. Parameter writing is enabled. Fourthaxis mirror image ON F10/11 table format is used
PWE REV4 TAPEF
NOTE
See Page 33 for details.
25
2.4
CRT/MDI Operation and Display (T Series)
Current position display

D Function button
POS
Press
(page) or the corresponding soft key to cause any of the
following three types of displays to appear. (1) Absolute coordinates Distance from the programmed zero point
POS
O0001 N0023 X 200.000 Z 220.000 C 0.000 Y 0.000

PART COUNT RUN TIME 2H47M CYCLE TIME 0H ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 16:14:02 BUF AUTO [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] 1786 1M47S T0101 [ ]
(2) Relative coordinates Any tool position can be set to 0 by

CAN
5
X
. This holds true also of Z and Y.

ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
O0001 N0023 X 200.000 Z 220.000 C 0.000 Y 0.000

PART COUNT RUNTIME 3H30M CYCLE TIME 0H ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 20:03:21 AUTO [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] 23 2M14S 0 T0101 [ ]
(3) General coordinates
Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates Machine coordinates
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) U 0.000 W 0.000 H 0.000 V 0.000 (MACHINE) X 118.170 Z 21.470 C 0.676 Y 0.046 RUN TIME 3H30M ACT.F 0 MM/M 20:04:37 [ ABS ] [ REL ]
O0100 N0000 (ABSOLUTE) X 200.179 Z 220.000 C 0.000 Y 0.000 (DISTANCE TO GO) X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 Y 0.000 PART COUNT CYCLE TIME 0H S 0 AUTO ALL ] [ HNDL ] 23 2M14S T0101 [ ]
10
The target screen can be selected directly by the corresponding soft key. The operating time and part count are displayed. Two types of operating time and parts count are displayed on the coordinate display screen (position).
26
Setting data display/setting
D Function button
DGNOS PARAM
(Parameter pages 1 and 2 are the setting data screens.) When the title parameter is not on the screen, press the
DGNOS PARAM
PARAMETER (SETTING TVON ISO INCH I/O SEQ 1) =1 =1 =0 =0 =1
O0001 N0001
(0:EIA 1:ISO ) (0:MM 1:INCH)
key or
the corresponding soft key to select the parameter screen.

NO. TVON 21:35:25 [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [
CLOCK 94/05/16 12:11:52 S 0 T0101 MDI ] [SVPRM ] [ ]
(page) [Setting] MDI mode

PARAMETER O0001 N0001 (SETTING 2) _PWE =0 (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE) TAPEF =0 (SEQUENCE STOP) PRGNO = 0 SEQNO =0 PART TOTAL = 23 PART REQUIRED = 0 PART COUNT = 23 RUN TIME 3H36M CYCLE TOME 0H 0M 0S NO. PWE S 0 T0101 21:36:25 MDI [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ ] [SVPRM ] [ ]
or CURSOR CURSOR
Numeral
INPUT
Display Item
TVON ISO INCH I/O (Note) SEQ
0
No TV check is made. EIA code output (during punch) Metric input
1
A TV check is made. ISO code output (during punch) Inch input
Reader/punch interface channel is selected. Sequence numbers are not inserted automatically when a program is entered from the MDI. Parameter writing is disabled. F10/11 table format is not used. Sequence numbers are inserted automatically when a program is entered from the MDI. Parameter writing is enabled. F10/11 table format is used.
PWE TAPEF
NOTE
See Page 33 for details.
27
2.5
CRT/MDI Operation and Display (with MMC)
(1) Operation Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently arranged on 00C. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0C. The page key , and selection key , cursor key
on the software operators
panel are of combined use with the function key. Press the corresponding key for use as a page key, cursor key, and selection key on the software operators panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the FUNC key as the function key. Five keys on the right half ten keys are effective for the variable section, and the other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position display data in the fixed section. When the number is specified by a method like the parameter screen, because there is no NO. key use the cursor key (2) Display Press
MMC/ CNC
instead.
key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen
when the MMC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/MDI panel. The CNC screen consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the part that is surrounded by the frame at the bottom right, and its display contents are the same as displayed on the 9 CRT display of 0C. Therefore, the screen selected by function key, page key, cursor key, and soft key is displayed. The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display contents are position data, operation time (optional), modal data, and S, T command value, as shown on the screen. Display items of this section cannot be changed by the screen selection operation. However, its display contents are always renewed. Fixed section
8
X Y Z
(MODAL) G64 G00 G17 G91 G22 G94 G21 G40 G49 G80 G98 G67 G54
ABS
0.000 0.000 0.000

F R P Q H M S T
O0009 N0009
PART COUNT RUN TIME CYCLE TIME

NO. 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020
0 29H 47M 0H 0M 0S
DATA 00000000 00000001 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 MDI
PARAMETER NO. DATA 0001 10000100 0002 00000011 0003 00000000 0004 01110111 0005 01110111 0006 01110111 0007 01110111 0008 00000011 0009 01000100 0010 11000100 NO. 0001 =
9
Variable section
10
REL
ALL
PRGRM DGNOS
28
2.6 Data Input/Output (FANUC Cassette)
Setting the beginning of the file

1 2 Select the EDIT mode Press the
PRGRM
key several
PROGRAM O1224 N0000 SYSTEM EDITION 0466 25 PROGRAM NO. USED : 14 FREE : 49 MEMORY AREA USED : 275 FREE : 3820 PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST O0010 O2000 O0020 O0030 O0200 O0300 O0555 O1200 O0777 O1234 O0040 O0050 O1969 O1224
times to select the program list screen.
> 03:04:17 [ PRGRM ] [ CONDNS ] [
S 0 T ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ]
3 4
Key in address N. Key in the target file number. N0 Locates the beginning of the cassette. This is used regardless of whether the file is on the floppy disk. N1 Locates the beginning of the cassette. This is used when the file is on the floppy disk. N2 to N9999 Locates the beginning of any file.
CNC parameter output

1 2 Select the EDIT mode Press the
DGNOS PARAM
key several
PARAMETER O1224 N0000 (SETTING 1) _REVX = 0 REVY = 0 TVON = ISO = 0 INCH = 0 I/O = ABS = 0 SEQ = 0
times to select the parameter screen.
0 (0:EIA 1:ISO) (0:MM 1:INCH) 0 (0:INC 1:ABS) CLOCK 10/01/10 03:30:18
NO. REVX = 03:30:09 [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [
S 0 T EDIT ] [ SVPRM ] [ ]
Press the
OUTPT START
key, and output begins.
NOTE
Parameter Nos. nine hundreds (900 to 999) are not output.
PMC parameter output

1 2 Select the EDIT mode. Press the screen. 3 Press the
OUTPT START
DGNOS PARAM
key several times to select the DGNOS (diagnose)
29
Program output
1 2 Select the EDIT mode. Press the
PRGRM
1
key several
times to select the program list screen.
> 03:04:17 [ PRGRM ] [ CONDNS ] [
S 0 T ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ]
3 4 5
Key in address O. Key in the target program number. Press the

OUTPT START
4
* Allprogram output: 09999
OUTPT START
Offset output
1 2 Select the EDIT mode. Press the
MENU OFSET
5
OFFSET O1224 N0000 NO. DATA NO. DATA 001 009 0.000 002 0.000 010 12.269 003 5.000 011 10.230 004 0.000 012 11.265 005 12.580 013 8.562 006 0.000 014 0.000 007 0.000 015 0.000 008 0.000 016 0.000 ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 NO. 013 = S 0 T 03:22:13 MDI [ OFFSET ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ WORK ] [ TOOLLF ]
key several
times to select the offset screen.
Press the
OUTPT START
Conversational mode data output

[M series] 1 2 Select the EDIT mode. Press the
MENU OFSET
key several times to select the conversational mode
data screen. 3 Press the

OUTPT START
10
30
CNC parameter input
1 Set setting data PWE to 1 (page 2 of the parameter screen).
PARAMETER O1224 N0000 (SETTING 2) _PWE = 1 (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE) REV4 = 0 TAPEF = 0 (SEQUENCE STOP) PRGNO = 0 SEQNO = 0 PART TOTAL = PART REQUIRED = PART COUNT = RUN TIME NO. PWE = 03:35:07 [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ 17 50 17 OH 4M CYCLE TIME OH OM 2S S MDI 0 T ]
This is set in the MDI mode or at an emergency stop.
] [ SVPRM ] [
NOTE
Alarm P/S100 occurs at this point. Press the
DGNOS PARAM
key again to
cause the parameter screen to appear. Select the EDIT mode. * Release the emergency stop condition. Press the
INPUT
key, and input begins.
* Alarm P/S000 occurs at this point. Turn the CNC power off and on again. * If you want to enter parameters during the emergency stop state, press and hold down the
EOB
Key, then press the
INPUT
Key. In
NOTE
this case, it is not necessary to select the EDIT mode. It is impossible to enter parameter Nos. nine hundreds (900 to 999).
PMC parameter input

1 2 3 4 5 Select the EDIT mode. Locate the beginning of the file. Disable program protection (KEY=1). Turn to 1 at setting parameter PWE. Press the screen. 6 Press the
INPUT
DGNOS PARAM
key several times to select the DGNOS (diagnose)
NOTE
PWE should be 1 in case of parameter 393#7=0.
Program input
1 2 3 4 Select the EDIT mode. Locate the beginning of the file. Disable program protection (KEY=1). Press the
PRGRM
key several
times to select the program screen.
> 03:04:17 [ PRGRM ] [ CONDNS ] [
S 0 T ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ]
31
Press the
INPUT
* When only one program is entered. 6 7 8 Key in address O. Key in the target program number. Press the
INPUT
Offset input
1 2 3 4 Select the EDIT mode. Locate the beginning of the file. Disable program protection (KEY=1). Press the
MENU OFSET
key several
OFFSET O1224 N0000 NO. DATA NO. DATA 001 009 0.000 002 0.000 010 12.269 003 5.000 011 10.230 004 0.000 012 11.265 005 12.580 013 8.562 006 0.000 014 0.000 007 0.000 015 0.000 008 0.000 016 0.000 ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 NO. 013 = S 0 T 03:22:13 MDI [ OFFSET ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ WORK ] [ TOOLLF ]
times to select the offset screen.
Press the
INPUT
6
Conversational mode data input [M series]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select the EDIT mode. Locate the beginning of the file. Disable program protection (KEY=1). Press the
PRGRM
key several times to select the program list screen.
Key in address 0. Key in any program number. Press the

INPUT
Select the AUTO mode. A program entered before is executed.
* Be cautious about the following parameter.

PRM, No. 015 Caution * * * * * * *
10
CAUTION When a decimal point is omitted from an address in which it can be used: 1 : mm, inch, and s units (usually) 0 : Least input increment (at data input time)
32
Parameters related to data input/output
To use the FANUC floppy cassette, set the parameters as follows: Setting: Parameter:
PRM, No. 002
I/O = 0 (Note) ISO = 1

1 * * * * 0 * 1
PRM, No. 552
10
(4800BPS)
PRM, No. 010
Note
NOTE1 1 : Protects program numbers 9000s (9000 to 9999). 0 : Enables editing of program numbers 9000s (9000 to 9999).
PRM, No. 038 0 1 * * Note * * *
NOTE2 1 : A full keyboard is used. 0 : A standard keyboard is used. NOTE3 I/O = selects a device used for data input/output through a reader/ punch interface. F nction Function
Feed (NFED) 20 mA current loop (ASR33) Stop bit (STP2) I/O device model specification Baud rate Connector number
Related parameter No. I/O=0

2.7 2.2 2.0 38.7 38.6 552 M5 Channel 1
I/O=1
12.7 12.2 12.0 38.7 38.6 553 M5 Channel 1
I/O=2
50.7
I/O=3
51.7
Unusable 50.0 38.5 38.4 250 M74 Channel 2 51.0 38.2 38.1 251 M77/M73 Channel 3
For M77, either RS232C or RS422 can be selected by parameter No. 55.3. The connector number is M73 when RS422 is used with an external clock.
33
Displaying the directory of floppy disk files

1 2 3 4 5
Press the EDIT switch on the machine operators panel. Press function
PRGRM
key .
Press soft key [FLOPPY]. Press page key or .
The screen below appears.

DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) NO. FILE NAME 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 PARAMETER ALL. PROGRAM O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O005 O0100 O0555 S EDIT [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ DELETE] [ O0555 N0000 (METER) VOL 65.6 1.9 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.9 1.3 0 T ]
19:36:51 [ SRHFIL ]
Press a page key again to display another page of the directory.
Reading files
1
Press soft key [READ] after directry is displayed.
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) NO. FILE NAME
O0555 N0000 (METER) VOL
8
READ _FILE NO. = NUM. 19:38:35 [ EXEC ] [
CAN ]
PROGRAM NO. = S EDIT [ ] [ ] [ STOP ] 0 T
2 3
Enter a file number, then press function
INPUT
key .
10
To modify the program number, enter the program number, then press function
INPUT
key.
4 5
Press soft key [EXEC]. Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in the screen of directory display.
34
Outputting programs
1
Press soft key [PUNCH] after directry is displayed.
PUNCH _FILE NO. = NUM. 19:39:17 [ EXEC ] [

CAN ]
_ PROGRAM NO. = S EDIT [PRGNO ] [ ] [ STOP ] 0 T
Enter a program number. To write all programs into a single file, enter 9999 in the program number field. In this case, the file name ALL.PROGRAM is registered. Then press function
INPUT
key.
3 4
Press soft key [EXEC]. Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in the screen of directry display.
Deleting files
1
Press soft key [DELETE] after directry is displayed.
DELETE _FILE NO. = NUM. 19:39:56 [ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ ] [
S EDIT ]
[ STOP ]
Specify the file to be deleted. When specifying the file with a file number, type the number and press function
INPUT
key.
3 4
Press soft key [EXEC]. Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in the screen of directry display.
35
Procedure for changing the file name

1 2
Press soft key [RENAME] after directry is displayed. Position the cursor to FILE NO. then enter the number of the file whose name is to be changed. Press the
INPUT
key.
Position the cursor to NAME and key in a new file name. Then, press the
INPUT
key.
4 5
Press soft key [EXEC]. To return to the previous screen, press the [CAN] soft key.
3
FILE DIRECTORY NO. FILE NAME 0001 PARAMETER 0002 ALL.PROGRAM 0003 O0001 0004 O0021 0005 O0041 0006 O0615 0007 O0651 0008 O0601 0009 O0645 RENAME FILE NO. = NAME= NUM. 21:59:53 [ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ ] O0001 N0000 (METER) VOL 87.1 87.1 1.9 7.1 7.1 5.8 9.1 7.1 5.8
5
S EDIT [ 0 T0101 ] [ STOP ]
10
36
3. OPERATION LIST
S E TTING PWE=1
Classification
Function
Resetting of operating time
KEY SW
Mode
Resetting of number of machined parts Reset Resetting of OT alarm
At powerup
Resetting of alarm 100
Parameter input
MDI mode
Offset input
Setting data input Registration f from MDI PMC parameter input f f
MDI mode
MDI mode
Tool length measurement
JOG mode
Parameter input (NC tape memory) )
f f f
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
Registration from NC tape
PMC parameter input
Offset input f
EDIT mode EDIT/AUTO mode EDIT mode
Program registration
Parameter punch out
PMC parameter punch out Tape punch out
EDIT mode
Offset punch out
EDIT mode
All programs punch out
EDIT mode
One program punch out
EDIT mode
37
Function key
POS
R
Operation
1

AND
CAN
POS
CAN
2
CAN
CAN
AND
RESET
3
No.
Parameter number
RESET
INPUT
Data
INPUT
PARAM
PWE =0
OFSET
No.
Offset number
INPUT
Offset value
INPUT
PARAM
No.
INPUT
Data
INPUT
DGNOS
No.
Diagnostic number
INPUT
Data
INPUT
POS
(Relative coordinate system display)

OFSET
CAN
POS OFSET
Place tool in measurement position

INPUT
No.
Offset number PARAM
EOB
AND
INPUT
PARAM
Emergency stop
EOB
AND
INPUT
DGNOS
INPUT
OFSET
INPUT
PRGRM
INPUT
PARAM
OUTPT
DGNOS
OUTPT
OFSET
OUTPT
10
PRGRM
O
9999
OUTPT
PRGRM
Program number
OUTPT
38
3. OPERATION LIST
S E TTING PWE=1
Classification
Function
KEY SW
Mode
EDIT/AUTO mode
Search for program number
Search for sequence number
AUTO mode
Search for address/word Search Search for address only
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
Search for offset number Search for diagnostic number Search for parameter number Display of memory used f f f f f f
EDIT mode
Deletion of all programs
EDIT mode
Deletion of one program
EDIT mode
Deletion of multiple blocks Editing Deletion of one block
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
Word deletion
EDIT mode
Word alteration
EDIT mode
Word insertion
EDIT mode
Collation
Memory collation f
EDIT/AUTO mode EDIT/AUTO mode EDIT mode
Program registration
Output of all programs
I/O to and from FANUC Cassette
Output of one program
EDIT mode EDIT/AUTO mode f EDIT mode EDIT/AUTO mode
File head search
File deletion
Program collation
39
Function key
PRGRM
O
Operation
1
Program number b (Cursor) Sequence number search
Program number search PRGRM PRGRM b (Cursor)
Data to be searched for Address to be searched for Offset number
(Cursor) b (Cursor)
PRGRM
OFSET
No.
INPUT
DGNOS
No.
Diagnostic number Parameter number
INPUT
PARAM
No.
INPUT
PRGRM
PRGRM
5
9999
DELET
PRGRM
PRGRM
Program number Sequence number
DELET
PRGRM
DELET
PRGRM
EOB
DELET
7
DELET
PRGRM
Search for word to be deleted
PRGRM
Search for word to be changed New data
ALTER
Search for word immediately before insertion location New data PRGRM
INSRT
PRGRM
INPUT
9
File number 9999
INPUT
PRGRM
INPUT
PRGRM
OUTPT
10
OUTPT
PRGRM
Program number File number File number File number

INPUT
PRGRM
PRGRM
OUTPT
PRGRM
INPUT
INPUT
40
3. OPERATION LIST
S E TTING PWE=1
Classification
Function
KEY SW
Mode
Playback
NC data input
TEACHIN JOG/HANDLE mode
Memory all clear f f
At powerup
Parameter clear Clear Program clear
At powerup
At powerup
Sub PCB all clear
At powerup
41
Function key
Move machine PRGRM NC data
RESET INSRT X
Operation
1
,
Y
or
INSRT
EOB
INSRT
2
AND
DELET
RESET
DELET
3
AND
S
DELET
(However, set PWE on main side to 0.)
10
42
4. G CODE LIST
M series
G code list (M series)
G code G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G08 G09 G10 G11 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G33 G37 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G52 G53 00 08 11 00 08 07 00 01 00 06 04 02 17 00 01 Group Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW Dwell, Exact stop High speed cycle machining Advanced preview control Exact stop Data setting Data setting mode cancel Polar coordinates command cancel Polar coordinates command XpYp plane selection ZpXp plane selection YpZp plane selection Input in inch Input in mm Stored stroke check function on Stored stroke check function off Reference position return check Return to reference position Return from reference position 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return Skip function Thread cutting Automatic tool length measurement Corner offset circular interpolation Cutter compensation cancel Cutter compensation left Cutter compensation right Tool length compensation + direction Tool length compensation direction Tool offset increase Tool offset decrease Tool offset double increase Tool offset double decrease Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel Scaling Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis Function
(1/3)
43

G code G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G61 G62 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G73 G74 G75 G76 G77 G78 G79 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G96 G97 G98 G99 G107 00 13 10 03 00 05 09 01 09 01 09 16 12 00 15 00 14 Group Function Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection Single direction positioning Exact stop mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode Macro call Macro modal call Macro modal call cancel Coordinate rotation Coordinate rotation cancel Peck drilling cycle Counter tapping cycle Plunge grinding cycle (0GSC) Fine boring cycle
(2/3)
Direct constantdimension plunge grinding cycle (0GSC) Continuousfeed surface grinding cycle (0GSC) Intermittentfeed surface grinding cycle (0GSC) Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle or external operation function Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Absolute command Increment command Setting for work coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed Feed per minute Feed per rotation Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Return to initial point in canned cycle Return to R point in canned cycle Cylindrical interpolation
10
44
4. G CODE LIST
G code G150 G151 G152 G160 G161 20 20 19 Group Function Normal direction control cancel mode Normal direction control left side on Normal direction control right side on Infeed control function cancel (0GSC) Infeed control function (0GSC)
(3/3)
CAUTION 1. Multiple G codes of different groups can be specified in a single block. When multiple G codes of one group are specified in a block, the G code specified last is effective. 2. If any G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle mode, the canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the G80 condition is entered. However, a G code of group 01 is not affected by any of the canned cycle G codes.
NOTE 1. Modal G codes have the following initial conditions when the power is turned on or the system is reset to the clear state (bit 6 of parameter No. 045). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 2. 3. Those G codes marked in Table 3 are specified automatically. G20 and G21 retain their original conditions. When the power is turned on, G22 is specified automatically. When the system is reset, G22 and G23 retain their original conditions. G00 or G01 is automatically selected depending on the setting of bit 6 of parameter No. 011. G90 or G91 is automatically selected depending on the setting of bit 7 of parameter No. 030.
The G codes of group 00, except G10 and G11, are oneshot G codes. If a G code that does not appear in the G code list is specified, or a G code whose options are not supported is specified, alarm No. 010 is displayed. A G code is displayed from each group.
4.
45
T series
G code list (T series) G code system (Note 7) A B C
G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G32 G34 G36 G37 G40 G41 G42 G50 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G33 G34 G36 G37 G40 G41 G42 G92 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11 G17 G18 G19 G70 G71 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G33 G34 G36 G37 G40 G41 G42 G92 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G65 G66 G67 G68 04 G69 12 00 14 00 07 00 01 00 08 06 09 16 00 01
(1/2) Function
Group p
Positioning (rapid traverse) Linear interpolation (feed) Circular interpolation CW Circular interpolation CCW Dwell Data setting Data setting mode cancel XpYp plane selection ZpXp plane selection YpZp plane selection Inch data input Metric data input Stored stroke check function ON Stored stroke check function OFF Spindle speed fluctuation detect OFF Spindle speed fluctuation detect ON Reference point return check Return to reference point 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return Skip cutting Thread cutting Variablelead thread cutting Automatic tool compensation X Automatic tool compensation Z Tool nose radius compensation cancel Tool nose radius compensation left Tool nose radius compensation right Coordinate system setting, max. spindle speed setting Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system 1 setting Workpiece coordinate system 2 setting Workpiece coordinate system 3 setting Workpiece coordinate system 4 setting Workpiece coordinate system 5 setting Workpiece coordinate system 6 setting Macro calling Macro modal call Macro modal call cancel Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cut mode (0TTC) Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cut mode cancel (0TTC)
10
46
4. G CODE LIST
G code list (T series) G code system (Note 7) A
G70 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G71 G72 G73 G74 G80 G83 G84 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G92 G94 G96 G97 G98 G99
G107
(2/2) Function
Group p
B
G70 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G71 G72 G73 G74 G80 G83 G84 G86 G87 G88 G89 G77 G78 G79 G96 G97 G94 G95 G90 G91 G98 G99
G107
C
G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G77 G78 G72 G73 G74 G75 G80 G83 G84 G86 G87 G88 G89 G20 G21 G24 G96 G97 G94 G95 G90 G91 G98 G99
G107
Finishing cycle (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Stock removal in turning (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Stock removal in facing (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) 00 Pattern repeating (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Peck drilling on Z axis (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Grooving on X axis (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Multiple threading cycle (other than 0GCC or 00GCC) Traverse grinding cycle (0GCC, 00GCC) Traverse direct constant dimension grinding cycle (0GCC, 00GCC) 01 Oscillation grinding cycle (0GCC, 00GCC) Oscillation direct constantdimension grinding cycle (0GCC, 00GCC) Canned cycle for drilling cancel Cycle for face drilling Cycle for face tapping 10 Cycle for face boring Cycle for side drilling Cycle for side tapping Cycle for side boring Outer cycle 01 diameter/internal diameter cutting
Thread cutting cycle Endface turning cycle Constant surface speed control
02 05 03
Constant surface speed control cancel Per minute feed Per revolution feed Absolute programming Incremental programming Return to initial level
11 00 21 20
Return to R point level Cylindrical interpolation Polar coordinate interpolation mode Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode Polygonal turning cancel Polygonal turning
G112
G113 G250 G251
G112
G113 G250 G251
G112
G113 G250 G251
47
CAUTION 1. A number of G codes can be specified in the same block. When more than one G code of the same group is specified, the G code specified later is effective. 2. If any G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle mode, the canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the G80 condition is entered. However a G code of group 01 is not affect4ed by any of the canned cycle G codes.
NOTE 1. are initial G codes when turning power on. G codes marked For G20 and G 21, the G code before turning power off remains. G00 or G01 can be selected by parameter setting. G codes of group 00 are not modal. They are only effective in the block in which they are specified. If a G code not listed on the table of G codes is inputted, or optional G code not specified in the system is commanded, an alarm (No. 010) is displayed. A G code is displayed from each group. G code system B and C are options. Whether G code system B or C is set by parameter No. 0036: GSPC.
2. 3.
4. 5.
10
48
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Positioning (G00) Start point Linear interpolation (G01) Start point Circular interpolation (G02, G03)
Explanation
P
Start point
G02 J
Center
End point (x, y) G03
(x, y)
Start point
I Center Helical cutting (G02, G03) Z End point
Tool path
Start point
X The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.
49
Tape format
G00P__ ;
T series
f
M series
f
G01P__ ;
2
G02 G17 G03 G02 G18 G03 G02 G19 G03 Yp__Zp__ I__K__ Xp__Zp__ I__K__ R__ F__ ; Xp__Yp__ I__J__ R__ F__ ; R__ F__ ; f f
Synchronously with arc of XpYp plane G02 G17 G03 Xp__Yp__ R__ I__J__ __ F__ ;
Synchronously with arc of ZpYp plane G02 G18 G03 Xp__Zp__ R__ I__K__ __ F__ ;
Synchronously with arc of YpZp plane G02 G19 G03 Yp__Zp__ R__ J__K__ __ F__ ;
Any one axis where circular interpolation is not applied.
10
50
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Dwell (G04)
Explanation
(Example) G04 P1000; Dwell by 1 seconds
Exact stop (G04, G09)
Speed
Time High-speed cycle machining (G05) (Example) Cycle 1: connection 2, repetition 1 Cycle 2: connection 3, repetition 3 Cycle 3: connection 0, repetition 1 G05P10001L2; Cycle is executed as 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3 Specify G05 only in a block using normal NC command format. Then specify move data in the special format explained next page. When zero is specified as the travel distance along all axes, normal NC command format can be used again for subsequent command specification.
High-speed remote buffer A (G05)
High-speed remote buffer B (G05)
High-speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the other hand, high-speed remote buffer B can directly use NC language coded with equipment such as an automatic programming unit to perform high-speed machining. This function can minimize the delay caused by acceleration/deceleration, which increases together with the feedrate, as well as the delay in the servo system. Tool movement can thus faithfully follow the command values, reducing the degree of error in the machined figure.
Advanced preview control (G08)
51
Tape format
X__ G04 P__ ; Dwell by second
T series
f
M series
f
2
G04 ; G09P ; f
3
G05 P10 L ; : : Start program number of called programs Repetition time of machining cycle f f
4
f f
Binary input operation enabled: G05; Binary input operation disabled: The travel distance along all axes are set to zero. Data format for binary input operation Byte High byte Data sequence Low byte High byte Low byte : : High byte Nth axis Low byte Check byte All data must be specified in binary. G05P01; Start high-speed machining X__Y__Z__; G05P00; End high-speed machining 2nd axis 1st axis
G08 Pp; p=1: p=0: Advanced preview control mode on Advanced preview control mode off
10
52
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Change of offset value by program (G10)
Explanation
The tool compensation amount can be set or changed with the G10 command. When G10 is used in absolute input (G90), the compensation amount specified in the command becomes the new tool compensation amount. When G10 is used in incremental input (G91), the compensation amount specified in the command is added to the amount currently set.
Change of offset value by program (G10)
Change of parameter by program (G10)
The parameter value can be changed by the machining program.
Polar coordinate command mode (G15, G16)
x y XpYp plane selection (G17) ZpXp plane selection (G18) YpZp plane selection (G19) X
Y X G17
X Z G18
Z Y G19
Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21) Extended stored stroke limit check on (G22, G23) (X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
X>I, Y>J, Z>K
53
Tape format
G10P__X (U)__Y (V)__Z (W)__R (C)__Q__; For geometry offset amount P=10000+geometry offset number For offset amount P= wear offset number R : Tool nose radius offset value Q : Imaginary tool nose number
T series
f
M series
2
f
G10L__PpRr; p : Offset No. r : Tool compensation amount Format (1) For tool compensation memory A G10 L11 P__R__; (2) For tool compensation memory B Setting/changing the geometric compensation amount G10 L10 P__R__; Setting/changing the wear compensation amount G10 L11 P__R__;
4
f f
G10 L50 ; N__P__ ; G11 N : Parameter number P : Parameter value G16 ; Polar coordinate command Xx Yy ; x: radius, y: angle (*) G15 ; Polar coordinate command cancel
G17 ; G18 ; G19 ;
8
Inch input Metric input f f f f
G20 ; G21 ;
G22X__Y__Z__I__J__K__ ; on G23 ; off (X, Z, I and K only for T series)
10
54
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Spindle speed fluctuation detection on (G26) Spindle speed fluctuation detection off (G25) (Example) (1)
Explanation
When an alarm is raised after a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed Reference for spindle speed at which check is started Specified speed r Fluctuation at which alarm is raised (r) Check Check
Actual speed (detected by position coder)
No check Time Specification of another speed (2) Alarm Start of check
When an alarm is raised before a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed specified by q Spindle speed specified by r
Spindle speed
q r
Specified speed
Actual speed
P Check Specification of another speed Reference position return check (G27) Start point No check Check Alarm Start of check
Time
P
Reference position
55
Tape format
G26PpQqRr ; spindle fluctuation detection on p: Time (in ms) from the issue of a new spindle rotation command (S command) to the start of checking whether the actual spindle speed is so fast that an overheat can occur. (When a specified speed is reached within the time period of P, a check is started at that time.) Tolerance (%) of a specified spindle speed (If a specified spindle speed lies within this range, it is regarded as having reached the specified value. Then, the checking of an actual spindle speed is started.) q = (1 actual spindle speed/specified spindle speed) 100 r: Spindle speed fluctuation (%) at which the actual spindle speed is so fast that an overheat can occur r = (1 speed that can cause overheat/specified spindle speed) 100 G26 enables the spindle speed fluctuation detection function, and G25 disables the spindle speed fluctuation detection. G25 ; Spindle fluctuation detection off
T series
f
M series
q:
10
G27P__ ;
56
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Reference position return (G28) 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference position return (G30)
Explanation
Reference poisition
P
Intermediate point Start point
Return to reference position return start position (G29)
Reference position
P
Intermediate position Skip function (G31) Multi-step skip function (G31)
Skip signal Start point
Equal lead thred cutting (G32) Thread cutting (G33)
F F: Lead
Variable lead thread cutting
Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37)
Starting point
Measured position reach signal Measured position
Specified position (Xa or Za) Offset value set by this command
57
Tape format
G28P__ ; P2 G30 P3 P4
T series
f
M series
f
P__ ;
P2: 2nd reference position return P3: 3rd reference position return P4: 4th reference position return
2
G29P__ ; f
3
G31P__F__ ; Move command G31 P__F__P__; F__: Feedrate P__: P1-P4 Dwell G04X (U, P)__(Q__); X(U, P)__: Dwell time Q__: Q1-Q4 f GCC f
5
f f
G32P__F__ ; G33P__F__ ;
7
G34P__FfKf ; f: Longer axis lead at the start position k: increase/decrease value per spindle revolution G36X xa ; G37Z za ; X xa, Z za: Specified position f
10
58
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Automatic tool length measurement (G37) Z
Explanation
Rapid traverse
A (Start position) Measurement position is commanded with G37 B (Deceleration position)
Measurement feedrate C (Measurement position) The tool stops when the approach end signal goes on. X
Compensation value = (Current compensation value) + [(Coordinates of the point at which the tool is stopped) (Coordinates of the programmed measurement position)] Tool nose radius compensation (G40, G41, G42)
G40
G40 : Programmed path
G41 : Left of programmed path
G42 : Right of programmed path Cutter compensation B (G39 to G42) Cutter compensation (G40 to G42) G41
G40
G40 : Programmed path
G41 : Left of programmed path

G41
G42
G42
G42 : Right of programmed path Tool length compensation A, B, C (G43, G44, G49)
G43: + offset G44: offset
Offset Z
59
Tape format
G92P__;Sets the workpiece coordinate system. (It can be set with G54 to G59.) Hff; Specifies an offset number for tool length offset.
T series
M series
f
G90 G37P__; Absolute command G37 is valid only in the block in which it is specified. P__ indicates the X-, Y-, Z-, or fourth axis.
f G40 G41 G42
P__ ;
G39X(I)__Y(J)__ ; Corner offset circular interpolation (Cutter compensation B only) G17 G18 G19 G40 G41 G42
D(H)__ ;
D(H): Tool offset number f G43 (Z__)H__ ; Tool length compensation A G44 G17 G18 G19 X__ Y__ Z__ H__ ;
G43 G44
Tool length compensation B G43 G44 __H__ ; Tool length compensation C
10
H: Offset number : Arbitrary one axis G49 ; Tool length compensation cancel
60
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Tool offset (G45 G48)
Explanation
G45 G46 G47 G48
Coordinate system setting Spindle speed setting (G50)

: offset value P X P4 P4 P0 P3
Increases Decrease Double increase Double decrease
Scaling (G50, G51)
P3
P2 P1 P1 P1 to P4: Programmed shape P1 to P4: Scaled shape P0: Scaling center P2
Local coordinate system setting (G52)
(Local coordinate system) P

(Workpiece coordinate system 1: G54)
(Local coordinate system) (Workpiece coordinate system 2:G55) (Workpiece coordinate system) (Workpiece coordinate system 6:G59)
(Workpiece reference position offset)
(Parameter value) (Machine coordinate system) (Origin of the machine coordinate system) (Reference position)
Machine coordinate system selection (G53)
61
Tape format
T series
M series
f
G45 (increase) G46 (decrease) G47 (double increase) G48 (double decrease)
X__ Y__ Z__
Dxx ;
G50X__Z__ ; Coordinate system setting G50S__ ; Spindle speed setting
4
G51X__Y__Z__P__(or I__J__K__) ; G50 ; Cancel X, Y, Z: Scaling center P: Magnification (I, J, and K are the scaling magnifications for the X-, Y-, and Z-axes respectively.) f
7
G52P__ ; G52P0 ; Local coordinate system setting Local coordinate system cancel f f
10
G53P__ ;
62
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Work coordinate system 1 6 selection (G54 G59)
Explanation
Workpiece coordinate system 1
Workpiece coordinate system 2 ZOFS2
Workpiece coordinate system 3 ZOFS3
Workpiece coordinate system 4 ZOFS4 Workpiece coordinate system 5 Workpiece coordinate system 6
ZOFS1 Machine reference position
ZOFS5 ZOFS6
ZOFS1: ZOFS2: ZOFS3: ZOFS4: ZOFS5: ZOFS6:
Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 1 Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 2 Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 3 Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 4 Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 5 Reference position offset for workpiece coordinate system 6 (Example) G54P12 ; Selecting additional work coordinate system 12 Start point Overrun
Additioonal work coordinate system selection (G54P) Spindle direction positioning (G60)
End point Start point End point Temporary stop Exact stop mode (G61) Speed
Time Automatic corner override (G62) a Le
Programmed path Ls a
Override is applied from a to b
63
Tape format
G54P__ ; G55P__ ; G56P__ ; G57P__ ; G58P__ ; G59P__ ; Work coordinate system 1 selection Work coordinate system 2 selection Work coordinate system 3 selection Work coordinate system 4 selection Work coordinate system 5 selection Work coordinate system 6 selection
T series
f
M series
f
G54Pn ; (n=1 64)
G60P__ ;
7
G61 ; f
G62 ;
10
64
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Tapping mode (G63) Speed
Explanation
Feed hold is ineffective Feedrate override is ineffective
Time Cutting mode (G64)
Speed
Time Macro call (G65) Main program O__: G66P0001L__: M02; Macro model call (G66, G67) Main program O__: G66P0001L__; X__ Y__ G67; Mirror image for double turrets (G68, G69) M99 M99 Macro program O0001; Macro program O0001;
Coordinate rotation (G68, G69) Y
Y X
R X
65
Tape format
G63 ;
T series
M series
f
2
G64 ; f
4
G65 P__L__ ; P: L: Program number Repetition count (1 to 9999) f f
5
f
G66 P__L__ ; G67 ; Cancel P: L: Program number Repetition count (1 to 9999)
7
G68 ; Mirror image for double turrets G69 ; Mirror image cancel
TT
8
f
G17 G18 G19
G68 ____R__ ;
G69 ; , : 3 axes corresponding to G17, G18, G19 R: Routation angle
10
66
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Canned cycle for lathes (G70 to G76) (G90, G92, G94)
Explanation
Canned cycle G90: Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle G92: Thread cutting cycle G94: End face turning cycle Multiple repetitive cycle G70: Finishing G71: G72: G73: G74: Stock removal in turning Stock removal in facing Pattern repeating End face peck drilling cycle
G75: Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle G76: Multiple thread cutting cycle (Example) G92 X axis Z
W 3(R) 4(R) 3(R) X/2 Z axis
1(R)
U/2
Zero point
Approx. 45 r
R . Rapid traverse F . Specified by F code
(The chamfered angle in the left figure is 45 degrees or less because of the delay in the servo system.)
Detailed chamfered thread
67
Tape format
G70 P__Q__ ; G71 U__R__ ; G71 G72 G72 G73 G73 G74 G74 G75 P__Q__U__W__F__S__T__ ; W__R__ ; P__Q__U__W__F__S__T__ ; W__R__ ; P__Q__U__W__F__S__T__ ; R__ ; X(u)__Z(w)__P__Q__R__F__ ; R__ ;
T series
f
M series
G75 X(u)__Z(w)__P__Q__R__F__ ; G76 R__ ; G76 X(u)__Z(w)__P__Q__R__F__ ; G90 G92
X__Z__I__F__ ;
G94 X__Z__I__F__ ;
10
68
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Canned cycle for grinding (G71 G74)
Explanation
G71: Traverse grinding cycle G72: Traverse direct fixed-dimension grinding cycle G73: Oscillation grinding cycle G74: Oscillation direct fixed-dimention grinding cycle (Example) G71 G71 A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ; X W A B U 1(1) 2 3(K) 4(1) 5 6(K) Z A: B: W: U: I: K: H: First depth of cut Second depth of cut Grinding range Dwell time Maximum specification time: 99999.999 seconds Feedrate of A and B Feedrate of W Number of repetitions Setting value: 1 to 9999 High-speed peck drilling cycle Left-hand tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Cancel Drilling cycle, spot drilling cycle Drilling cycle, counter boring cycle Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle
Canned cycle (G73, G74, G80 G89)
G73: G74: G76: G80: G81: G82: G83: G84: G85: G86:
(Example) G73 (G98)
G87: Boring cycle/Back boring cycle G88: Boring cycle G89: Boring cycle G73 (G99) Initial level
R point q q q d d q q q d d
R point
Z point
Z point
69
Tape format
G71 A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ; G72 P__A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ; G73 A__(B__)W__U__I__K__H__ ; G74 P__A__(B__)W__U__I__K__H__ ;
T series
GCC
M series
4
G73 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G74 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G76 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G81 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G82 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G83 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G84 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G85 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G86 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G87 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G88 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G89 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; G80 ; Cancel Gj j X__Y__Z__R__Q__P__F__K__ ; f
Hole position data Drilling data Drilling mode Number of repeat
8
Item Drilling mode Hole position data Drilling data Address Gj j X,Y Z R Q Explanation G73, G74, G76, G80 G89 Specifies the hole position by an incremental or absolute value. Specifies the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole. Specifies the distance from the initial level to point R. Specifies each cut-in value with G73 and G83 or the shift value with G76 and G87. (Always specified with an incremental value.) Specifies the dwell time at the bottom of the hole. Specifies the feed rate. Specifies the number of repeats for a series of operation 1 to 6.
10
P F Number of repeats K
70
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Canned grinding cycle (G75, G77, G78, G79) (Example) X
Explanation
G75: Plunge grinding cycle G77: Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle G78: Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle G79: Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle X(Z)
I J
(1) (R) (2) P
(3) (F) (6) (F) (4) (R) (5) P
X(Z) G75 I__J__K__X (Z)__R__F__P__L__ ; I: Depth-of-cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J: Depth-of-cut 2 ( A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) K: Total depth of cut X (Z): Range of grinding (A sign in the command specifies the direction of grinding.) R: F: P: L: Feedrate for I and J Feedrate for X (Z) Dwell time Grinding-wheel wear compensation (Note 1) G83: Front drilling cycle G84: Front tapping cycle G85: G87: G88: G89: Front boring cycle Side drilling cycle Side tapping cycle Side boring cycle
Canned cycle for drilling (G80 to G89)
G80: Drilling cycle cancel (Example) G83 (G87) (G99 mode) G83 (G87) (G98 mode) (Ma) (Ma) Initial level
R point level (M), P dwell
R point level q d
(M), dwell
q q
Z point dwell
P
Z point dwell
71
Tape format
G75 I__J__K__X (Z)__R__F__P__L__ ; G77 I__J__K__X (Z)__R__F__P__L__ ; G78 I__J__K__X (Z)__R__F__P__L__ ; G79 I__J__K__X (Z)__R__F__P__L__ ;
T series
M series
GSC
G83 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G84 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G86 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G87 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G88 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G89 X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(M_) ; G80 ; Cancel GVV X(Z)__C__Z(X)__R__Q__P__F__K__(MVV) ;
Hole position data Drilling data Drilling mode Number of repeat
Designation Drilling mode Hole position Drilling data
Address GVV X/U (Z/W)C/H Z(X) R Q
Description G80, G83, G84, G86 to G89 Specifies the hole position by an incremental or absolute value. Specifies the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole. Specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level. Specifies each cut-in value with G83 (G87). This value is always specified with an incremental value to specify radius. Specifies the dwell time at the bottom of the hole. Specifies the feedrate. Specifies the number of repeats for a series of operations. M-code (specified by a parameter) of Caxis clamp.
10
P F Number of repeats M code of C-axis clamp K MVV
72
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Absolute/Incremental command (G90/G91) (Example) 60 30
Explanation
Absoulute command Incremental command Change of workpiece coordinate system (G92) Y

P
X F
100 50 G90X100Y60 ; G91X50Y30 ;
Feed/minute, Feed/revolution (G94, G95)
Move distance per minute
Move distance per revolution
Feed/minute (G94) Constant suface speed control (G96, G97)
Feed/revolution (G95) Surface speed
Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
Z(X=0)
Initial point return/R point return (G98, G99) G99
G98
Initial point
R point
Z point Cylindrical interpolation (G107) Z C R
73
Tape format
G90__ ; Absolute command G91__ ; Incremental command G90__G91__ ; Change of workpiece coordinate system
T series
f (G code system B, C)
M series
f
G92P__ ;
G94 . . . . . . F__ ; or G95 . . . . . . F__ ; (T series <G code system B, C> M series)
G98 . . . . . . F__ ; G99 . . . . . . F__ ; (T series <G code system A>
G96 Ss ; G97 ; Cancel s: Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
G96 Ss P ; G97; Cancel : s: 13 (X axis, Y axis, Z axis) Surface speed (m/min or feet/min) f (G coed system B, C)
8
f
G98__ ; G99__ ;
G107 Cr; Cylindrical interpolation mode C: Rotary axis name r: Radius of cylinder G107 CO; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
10
74
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Functions
Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G112, G113)
Explanation
C C axis X axis
Normal direction control (G140, G141, G142) C axis Tool C axis Tool
Programmed path
Normal direction (proceeding direction) Infeed control (G160, G161) (Example) r r r r End point
Start point Y Z Polygon turning (G250, G251) Workpiece Workpiece
Tool
75
Tape format
G112 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
T series
f
M series
f
2
G140 ; Normal direction control cancel G141 ; Normal direction control left G142 ; Normal direction control right f
4
G160 ; G161 Rr ; r: Cancel 0GSC
Cut in depth
6
G250 ; Polygon turning cancel G251P__Q__ ; Polygon turning P, Q: Potation ratio of spindle and workpiece f
10
76
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
FS0TC/FS15TA format comparison table
Function comparison A: B: C: D: Both models have the same functions and formats. Both models have the same functions, but different formats. Both models have the same formats, but different functions. The models have different functions and formats.
Item
1 2 3 4
Function
Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation Dwell G00XZ;
FS15TA
G01XZF; G02/03XZR(IK)F; G98G04P/X/U; (in time units) G99G04P/X/U; (in rotation units) G07.1 Rotation axis name and cylinder diameter G10L11PXZYRQ; L11 Wear compensation G10L10PXZYRQ; L10 Geometric compensation
Cylindrical interpolation
Data setting
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Polar coordinate interpolation mode Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode Plane selection Inch input Metric input Stored stroke check ON Stored stroke check OFF Spindle speed detection OFF Spindle speed detection ON fluctuation fluctuation
G12.1 G13.1 G17/G18/G19 G20 G21 G22XZIK; G23; G25; G26PQRD; P : Check start timer Q : Check start tolerance ratio R : Minimum variation ratio detected as an alarm D : Minimum variation width detected as an alarm G27XZ; G28XZ; G30P2/3/4XZ; G31XZ; G32XZFQ; Q : Threading start shift angle G32XZEQ; E : Number of screw threads per inch
16 17 18 19 20
Reference check
position
return
1st reference position return check nth reference position return check Skip cutting Thread cutting
77
2
FS0TC
G00XZ; G01XZF; G02/03XZR(IK)F; G04P/X/U; (in time units)
FS0TC tape format conversion
Function comparison
C A C C
G107 Rotation axis name and cylinder diameter G10PXZYRQ; For wear compensation, P : Wear compensation number For geometric compensation, P : 10000 + geometric compensation number G112 G113 G17/G18/G19 G20 G21 G22XZIK; G23; G25; G26PQR; P : Check start timer Q : Check start tolerance ratio R : Minimum variation ratio detected as an alarm
B B A C C A A A C
9
A A A A G32XZE E : Lead along the major axis. It is impossible to specify the number of screw threads per inch and the threading start shift angle. D
G27XZ; G28XZ; G30P2/3/4XZ; G31XZ; G32XZF;
10
78
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Item
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Function
Variable lead thread cutting Automatic tool offset Tool nose radius compensation cancel Tool nose radius compensation (Left) Tool nose radius compensation (Right) Coordinate system setting Polygon turning cancel Polygon turning Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system select Workpiece coordinate system select Macro calling Macro modal calling Macro modal calling cancel Mirror image ON for double turret Mirror image OFF for double turret Finishing cycle Outer surface rough cutting canned cycle
FS15TA
G34XZFK; G37.*X/Z; G40 G41 G42 G50XZ; G50.2 G51.2PQ; G52XZ; G53XZ; G54 to G59 G65PLArgument; G66PLArgument; G67; G68; G69; G70PQ; G71PQUWIKDF ST;
39
End face rough cutting canned cycle
G72PQUWIKDF ST;
40 41 42
Closedloop turning canned cycle End face cuttingoff canned cycle Outer surface/inner surface cuttingoff canned cycle
G73PQUWIKDF ST; G74XZIKFD; G75XZIKFD;
79
FS0TC
G34XZFK; G36X; X axis G37X; Z axis G40 G41 G42 G50XZ; G250 G251PQ; G52XZ; G53XZ; G54 to G59 G65PLArgument; G66PLArgument; G67; G68; G69; G70PQ; G71UR; G71PQUWDF ST;
Function comparison
A D A A A A B B A A C A C A A A A
G71PQUWF ST; It is impossible to specify a cutting allowance for roughing. (I,K) An attempt to specify it is ignored. G72PQUWD FST; It is impossible to specify a cutting allowance for roughing. (I,K) An attempt to specify it is ignored. G73PQUWI KDFST; G74XZIK FD; G75XZIK FD;
D (C)
G72UR; G72PQUWFST;
D (C)
G73UR; G73PQUWFST; G74R; G74XZPQRF; G75R; G75XZPQRF;
B (A) B (A) B (A)
10
80
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Item
43
Function
Multiple repetitive cycle for threading canned
FS15TA
G76XZIKDFA PQ;
44
Canned cycles for drilling
G8*XYZRQPFL; L : Number of repeat
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
Outer surface/inner turning canned cycle
surface
G90XZIF; G92XZIFQ; G94XZKF; G96S; G97S; G98 G99 M98PL;
Threading canned cycle End face turning canned cycle Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Feed per minute Feed pre revolution Sub program calling
81
FS0TC
G76PQR; G76XZRPQF;

G76XZIKDF APQ; A threading method (P) can be selected only from P1 (singleedge cutting with constant cutting amount) and P2 (jigzag cutting with constant cutting amount). It is impossible to specify an arbitrary angle for the tool tip (A). If an angle other than those that can be specified in Series 0 (0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or 80 degrees) is specified, alarm P/S 062 is generated. G8*X (Z)CZ (X)R QPFL; L : Repetition count It is impossible to select an arbitrary drill axis. G90XZIF; G92XZIFQ; G94XZKF;
Function comparison
D (C)
G8*X (Z)CZ (X)RQ PFK; K : Number repeat
D (C)
G90XZRF; G92XZRF; G94XZRF; G96S; G97S; G98 G99 M98P;
B (A) D (C) B (A) C A A A
M98PL; If a number with more than three digits is specified in calling a subprogram, the lower three digits are regarded as a subprogram number (address P). If the number of repetitive calls is not specified, it is assumed to be 1.
B (A)
10
82
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
FS0MC/FS15MA format comparison table
Function comparison A: B: C: D: Both models have the same functions and formats. Both models have the same functions, but different formats. Both models have the same formats, but different functions. The models have different functions and formats.
Item
1 2 3
Function
Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation G00P; G01PF;
FS15MA
G17G02/G03XYR(IJ)F; G18G02/G03ZXR(KI)F; G19G02/G03Y ZR(JK)F;
Dwell
G98G04P/X/U; (in time units) G99G04P/X/U; (in rotation units) G09 G10LPR; command G15 G16 G17/G18/G19 G20 G21 G22XYZIJK; G23; return G27P; G28P; G29P; G30P2/3/4P; G31P; G33PFQ; Q : Threading start shift angle G33XZEQ; E : Number of screw threads per inch G37a; G39I/K/JJ/I/K; G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Exact stop Data setting Polar coordinate cancel
Polar coordinate command Plane selection Inch input Metric input Stored stroke check ON Stored stroke check OFF Reference check position
1st reference position return Return form reference position nth reference position return Skip cutting Thread cutting
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Automatic tool offset Corner arc Cutter compensation cancel Cutter compensation (Left) Cutter compensation (Right) Tool length compensation (+) Tool length compensation () Tool offset increase Tool offset decrease Tool offset double increase Tool offset double decrease
83
2
FS0MC
G00P; G01PF; G17G02/G03X YR(IJ)F; G18G02/G03Z XR(kI)F; G19G02/G03Y ZR(JK)F; G04P/X/U; (in time units)
FS0MC tape format conversion
Function comparison
C A C
4
C
G09 G10LPR; G15 G16 G17/G18/G19 G20 G21 G22XYZIJK; G23; G27P; G28P; G29P; G30P2/3/4; G31P; G33PF;
A A A A A C C A A A A A A C D
9
G37a; G39X/Z/Y(I/K/J)Y/X/Z(J/I/K); G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 A B A A A A A A A A A
10
84
5. PROGRAM FORMAT
Item
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Function
Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel Scaling Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system select Workpiece coordinate system select Single direction positioning Exact stop mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode Macro calling Macro modal calling Macro modal calling cancel Coordinate rotation Coordinate rotation cancel Canned cycles for drilling G49 G50
FS15MA
G51XYZP; G52P; (G90) G53P; G54 to G59 G60P; G61 G62 G63 G64 G65PLArgument; G66PLArgument; G67; (G17/G18/G19) G68abR; G69; G**XYZRQPFL; L : Number of repeat M**S; G84.2/.3XYZRQP FL; L : Number of repeat G90 G91 (G90) G92P; G94 G95 G96S; G97S; M98PL;
48
Rigid tapping
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Absolute command Increment command Coordinate system setting Feed per minute Feed per revolution Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Sub program calling
85
FS0MC
G49 G50 G51XYZP; G52P; (G90) G53P; G54 to G59 G60P; G61 G62 G63 G64 G65PLArgument; G66PLArgument; G67; (G17/G18/G19) G68abR; G69; G**XYZRQP FK; K : Number of repeat M**S; G84XYZRQP FK; K : Number of repeat G90 G91 (G90) G92P; G94 G95 G96S; G97S; M98P;
FS0MC tape format conversion
Function comparison
A A A A A C
3
C A A A A A C A A A G**XYZRQ PFL; L : Number of repeat M**S; G84XYZRQ PFL; L : Number of repeat D (C)
B (A)
A A A A A A A M98PL; If a number with more than three digits is specified in calling a subprogram, the lower three digits are regarded as a subprogram number (address P). If the number of repetitive calls is not specified, it is assumed to be 1. B (A)
10
86
6. CUSTOM MACRO
6.1
6.1.1
Custom Macro A
Types of variables
Type of variable Variable number
#100 #149 #500 #531 #1 #99 #1000 #5084
Common variable System variable
6.1.2
System variable
Contents
Corresponds to UI000 to UI015 Unified input of UI000 to UI015 Corresponds to UO000 to UO015 Unified output of UO000 to UO015 Unified output of UO100 to UO131 Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Tool compensation (Offset No. 1 99) Year, month, day Hour, minute, second No. of parts machined No. of parts machined No. of parts T/M Tool compensation (Offset memory A) Clock M Y axis offset T Imaginary tool tip position T Tool nose radius compensation T Z axis offset T X axis offset T Interface output signal T/M
Variable number
#1000 #1015 #1032 #1100 #1115 #1132 #1133 #2001 #2032 #2701 #2732 #2101 #2132 #2801 #2832 #2201 #2232 #2901 #2932 #2301 #2332 #2301 #2332 #2401 #2432 #2451 #2432 #2001 #2200 (#1 #99) #3011 #3012 #3901 #3902
Purpose
Interface input signal
Series
T/M
T/M
87
Variable number
#4001 #4022 #4102 #4109 #4111 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120 #5001 #5004
Contents
G code (group 01 22) B code F code H code M code Sequence number Program number S code T code 1st axis block end position : 4th axis block end position 1st axis current position : 4th axis current position 1st axis current position : 4th axis current position 1st axis skip signal position : 4th axis skip signal position 1st axis tool offset value : 4th axis tool offset value
Purpose
Modal information
Series
T/M
Block end position (Workpiece coordinate)
T/M
#5021 #5024
Machine nate
coordi-
T/M
#5041 #5044
Workpiece coordinate Skip signal position (Workpiece coordinate) Tool offset value
T/M
#5061 #5064
T/M
#5081 #5084
T/M
6.1.3
Argument specification (M series)
Correspondence between addresses and variable numbers Variable number (value)

#8004 #8005 #8006 #8009 #8010 #8011 #8013 #8014 #8016 #8017 #8018 #8019 #8020 #8024 #8025 #8026
Variable number (flag)

#8104 #8105 #8106 #8109 #8110 #8111 #8113 #8114 #8116 #8117 #8118 #8119 #8120 #8124 #8125 #8126
Address
I J K F G H M N P Q R S T X Y Z
10
88
6. CUSTOM MACRO
Correspondence between G codes of the argument specification and variable numbers Variable number (value)
#8030 #8031 #8032 #8033 #8035 #8036 #8037 #8038 #8039 #8040 #8041 #8042 #8045 #8046
Variable number (flag)

#8130 #8131 #8132 #8133 #8135 #8136 #8137 #8138 #8139 #8140 #8141 #8142 #8145 #8146
G code group number

00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16
G codes of the argument specification

One shot and others G00, G01, G02, G03 G17, G18, G19 G90, G91 G94 G20, G21 G40, G41, G42 G43, G44, G49 G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89 G98, G99 G50, G51 G66, G67 G61, G62, G63, G64 G68, G69
89
6.1.4
G code
G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65
Operation instructions and branch instructions

H code
H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H11 H12 H13 H21 H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 H31 H32 H33 H34 H80 H81
Function
Definition, stitution Addition Subtraction Product Division Logical sum Logical product Exclusive OR Square root Absolute value Remainder Conversion from BCD to binary Conversion from binary to BCD Combined multiplication/division Combined square root 1 Combined square root 2 Sine Cosine Tangent Arctangent Unconditional divergence Conditional vergence 1 Conditional vergence 2 Conditional vergence 3 Conditional vergence 4 Conditional vergence 5 Conditional vergence 6 didididididisub#i = #j #i = #j + #k #i = #j #k #i = #j #k
Definition
#i = #jB#k #i = #j. OR. #k #i = #j. AND. #k #i = #j. XOR. #k #i + #j #i = | #j | #i = #j trunc (#j / #k) #k (trunc : Discard fractions less than 1) #i = BIN (#j) #i = BCD (#j) #i=(#i #j)B #k
#i + #J 2 ) #K 2 #i + #J 2#K 2 #i = #j SIN (#k) #i = #j COS (#k) #i = #j TAN (#k) #i = ATAN (#j / #k) GOTOn IF#j = #k, GOTOn
G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65
H82 H83 H84 H85 H86 H99
IF#j0#k, GOTOn IF#ju#k, GOTOn IF#jt#k, GOTOn
9
IF#jy#k, GOTOn IF#jx#k, GOTOn P/S alarm number 500 +n occurrence
P/S alarm occurrence
10
90
6. CUSTOM MACRO
6.1.5 Macro call
Format
M98 (program number); G66P (program number); L (repetition count) G67; Mxx;
9001 9002 9003 240 241 242
Name
Simple call Modal call (M series) Subprogram call by M code
Program No.
Parameter No.
Remarks
Refer to 6 1 3f 6.1.3 for argument assignment. Displayed on program check screen but no MF nor M code is t sent. Set an M code that calls a subprogram specified by the parameter. Calls subprogram 9000. T code t is stored in common variable #149 as an argument.
Max. 3 M codes from M006 M255
Subprogram call by T code
Tt;
9000
040#5
91
6.2
6.2.1
Custom Macro B
Types of variables
Type of variable Variable number
#1 #33 #100 #149 #500 #531 #150 #199 #532 #999 #1000 #19099
Local variable Common variable Additional common variable (NOTE 1) System variable (NOTE 2)
NOTE 1 NOTE 2
Common variable #150 to #199 and #532 to #999 can be added. Part program length reduces by 6.6 m. Details are shown 6.2.2.
6.2.2
System variable
Contents
Corresponds to UI000 to UI015 Unified input of UI000 to UI015 Corresponds to UO000 to UO015 Unified output of UO000 to UO015 Unified output of UO100 to UO131 Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 32) Tool compensation (Offset No. 1 200) Tool compensation (Offset No. 1 400) Tool compensation (Offset memory A) M Y axis offset T Imaginary tool tip position T Tool nose radius compensation T Z axis offset T X axis offset T Interface signal output T/M
4
Purpose
Interface input signal
Variable number
#1000 #1015 #1032 #1100 #1115 #1132 #1133 #2001 #2032 #2701 #2732 #2101 #2132 #2801 #2832 #2202 #2232 #2901 #2932 #2301 #2332 #2301 #2332 #2401 #2432 #2451 #2482 #2001 #2200 #10001 #10400
Series
T/M
10
92
6. CUSTOM MACRO
Variable number
#2001 #2200 #2201 #2400 #10001 #10400 #11001 #11400 #3000 #3001 #3002 #3003 Clock 1 (Unit: 1 ms) Clock 2 (Unit: 1 hour) Control of single block stop, wait signal for FIN Control of feedhold, feedrate override, exact stop check Setting Year, month, day Hour, minute, second No. of parts machined No. of parts required G code (group 01 22) B code F code H code M code Sequence number Program number S code T code 1st axis block end position : 4th axis block end position 1st axis current position : 4th axis current position 1st axis current position : 4th axis current position 1st axis skip signal position : 4th axis skip signal position 1st axis tool offset value : 4th axis tool offset value Block end position (Workpiece coordinate) T/M Model information T/M No. of parts T/M Clock T/M
Contents
Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 200) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 200) Wear offset value (Offset No. 1 400) Geometry offset value (Offset No. 1 400)
Purpose
Tool compensation (Offset memory B)
Series
M
Alarm Clock
T/M T/M
#3004
T/M
#3005 #3011 #3012 #3901 #3902 #4001 #4022 #4102 #4109 #4111 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120 #5001 #5004
T/M T/M
#5021 #5024
Machine nate
coordi-
T/M
#5041 #5044
Workpiece coordinate Skip signal position (Workpiece coordinate) Tool offset value
T/M
#5061 #5064
T/M
#5081 #5084
T/M
93
Variable number
#5101 #5104
Contents
1st axis servo position deviation : 4th axis servo position deviation External workpiece zero point offset value
Purpose
Servo position deviation
Series
T/M
#2500 #2600 #2700 #2800 #2501 #2601 #2701 #2801 #2502 #2602 #2702 #2802 #2503 #2603 #2703 #2803 #2504 #2604 #2704 #2804 #2505 #2605 #2705 #2805 #2506 #2606 #2706 #2806 #2550 #2551 L #2556 #2650 #2651 L #2656 #2750 #2751 L #2756 #2850 #2851 L #2856
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis X axis
2
M
G54 workpiece point offset value
zero
3
M
zero
zero
zero
5
M
zero
6
M
zero
External workpiece zero point offset value G54 (Workpiece coordinate system 1) L G59 (Workpiece coordinate system 6) External workpiece zero point offset value G54 (Workpiece coordinate system 1) L G59 (Workpiece coordinate system 6) External workpiece zero point offset value G54 (Workpiece coordinate system 1) L G59 (Workpiece coordinate system 6) External workpiece zero point offset value G54 (Workpiece coordinate system 1) L G59 (Workpiece coordinate system 6)
8
Z axis T
9
C axis T
10
Y axis T
94
6. CUSTOM MACRO
Variable number
#7001 #7004 #7021 #7024 : #7941 #7944
Contents
G54 P1 workpiece zero point offset value G54 P2 workpiece zero point offset value : G54 P48 workpiece zero point offset value
Purpose
1st axis to 4th axis 1st axis to 4th axis 1st axis to 4th axis 1st axis to 4th axis
Series
M M
6.2.3
Argument assignment I/II

Correspondence Table between Argument Assignment II Addresses and Macro Variables
Argument Assignment II Addresses A B C I1 J1 K1 I2 J2 K2 I3 J3 K3 I4 J4 K4 I5 J5 K5 I6 J6 K6 Macro Variables #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 #18 #19 #20 #21 Argument Assignment II Addresses I7 J7 K7 I8 J8 K8 I9 J9 K9 I10 J10 K10 Macro Variables #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 #29 #30 #31 #32 #33
Correspondence Table between Argument Assignment I Addresses and Macro Variables

Argument Assignment I Addresses A B C D E F H I J K M Q R S T U V W X Y Z Macro Variables #1 #2 #3 #7 #8 #9 #11 #4 #5 #6 #13 #17 #18 #19 #20 #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26
95
6.2.4
Arithmetic commands
Expression
#i=#j #i=#j+#k #i=#j#k #i=#jOR#k #i=#jXOR#k
Purpose
Definition and substitution of variables Addition arithmetic
Contents
Definition, substitution Sum Subtraction Logical sum (at every bit of 32 bits) Exclusive OR (at every bit of 32 bits) Product Quotient Logical product (at every bit of 32 bits) Sine (degree unit) Cosine (degree unit) Tangent (degree unit) Arctangent (degree unit) Square root Absolute value Conversion from BCD to BIN Conversion from BIN to BCD Rounding off Discard fractions less than 1 Add 1 for fractions less than 1 The above arithmetic operations and functions can be combined. The order of priority in an arithmetic operation is function, multiplication arithmetic then addition arithmetic.
Multiplication arithmetic ti
#i=#j*#k #i=#j/#k #i=#jAND#k
Functions
#i=SIN [#j] #i=COS [#j] #i=TAN [#j] #i=ATAN [#j] #i=SQRT [#j]/[#k] #i=ABS [#j] #i=BIN [#j] #i= BCD [#j] #i=ROUND [#j] #i = FIX [#j] #i = FUP [#j]
Combination of arithmetic operations
7
6.2.5 Control command
Expression
IF [<conditional expression>] GOTO n Branch to sequence number n.
Purpose
Conditional b h branch
Kind of operation
#j EQ #k (=) #j NE #k (0) #j GT #k (>) #j LT #k (<) #jGE #k (y) #j LE #k (x)
Iteration
WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO m (m = 1, 2, 3) If omitted conditional expression, blocks from DO m to END m are eternally executed eternally.
#j EQ #k (=) #j NE #k (0) #j GT #k (>) #j LT #k (<) #jGE #k (y) #j LE #k (x)
10
96
6. CUSTOM MACRO
6.2.6 Macro call
Format
G65P (program number) L (repetition count) <argument assignment> G66P (program number); L (repetition count) <argument assignment> Gxx <argument ment> assign9010 : 9019 220 : 229
Name
Simple call
Program No.
Parameter No.
Remarks
Refer to 6.2.3 for argument assigni ment.
Modal call
Macro call by G code
Max. 10 G codes from G01G64 and G68G255 Macro call by M code Mxx <argument ment> assign9020 : 9029 230 : 239
Max. 10 M codes from M006 to M255 Subprogram call by M code Mxx;

9001 9002 9003 240 241 242
Refer to 6.2.3 for argument g assignment. Set G or M code that calls a program specified ifi d in i the parameter. Displayed on program check screen but no MF nor M code is t Set S t sent. an M code that calls a subprogram specified by the parameter. Calls subprogram 9000. T code t is stored in common variable #149 as an argument. Can be called up to 4 loops including simple call and modal call.
Max. 3 M codes from M006M255
Subprogram call by T code
Tt;
9000
045#5
Multiplex call
Main program O G65P M99 O O
G65P G65P M99 M99 Macro (level 4)
Macro (level 1)
97
6.2.7
Command range
Item Contents
Local variable: Common variable: #1#33 #100#149, #500#531
Variables
Additional common variable: #100#199, #500#999 System variable: Value of variables Maximum value "1047 Minimum value Constant in expression "1029 #1000#19099
Maximum value "99999999 Minimum value "0.0000001
Decimal point possible Arithmetic precision Macro call duplex Iteration classification no. Nesting Nesting of subprograms Decimal 8 digits Max. 4 loops 1 to 3 Max. 5 loops Max. 4 loops (8 loops including macro calls)
10
98
7. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

7.1 CNC Internal Status Display
Selfdiagnosis function displays

DGNOS number
000 to 022 027 048 to 086 100 to 147 148 to 199 200 to 249 250 to 299 700, 701 712 720 to 727 760 to 767 770 to 777 800 to 807
Displays
States of signals supplied from the machine to the PMC. If the system has no PMC, only 016 to 022 are valid Signal indicating when the pulse coder or position coder makes one turn. States of signals supplied from the PMC to the machine. If the system has no PMC, only 048 to 053 are valid. States of signals supplied from the PMC to the CNC. If the system has no PMC, only 116 to 122 are valid. States of signals supplied from the CNC to the PMC. If the system has no PMC, only 148 to 153 are valid. Window data from the PMC to the CNC. Window data from the CNC to the PMC. Internal state of the CNC. These are checked if a command is not responded with. If a signal is turned off during automatic operation, this DGNOS number indicates the reason. States of digital servo alarms. States of serial pulse coder alarms. Indicate a positional error for each axis.
99
CNC state display

If the CNC becomes inactive, but does not issue an alarm, press the DGNOS button to display the contents of DGNOS No. 700, 701, or 712. These DGNOS numbers show the state of the CNC.
0700
CSCT
CITL
COVZ
CINP CDWL
CMTN
CFIN
2
When these bits are 1, they mean: CFIN: The M, S, or T function is being executed. CMTN: A tool movement command is being executed during automatic operation. CDWL: A dwell command is being executed. CINP: CITL: CSCT:
0701
In position check is being made. The interlock signal is on. The spindle constantspeed reached signal is being awaited.
COVZ: The override is set to 0%.
CRST
CRST:
An emergency stop, external reset, reset & rewind signal, or a reset button on the MDI panel is on.
0702
STP
REST
EMS
RRW
RSTB
CSU
6
#7 1 1 1 1 1 1 #6 1 1 1 1 0 0 #5 1 0 0 0 0 0 #4 0 0 1 0 0 0 #3 0 0 0 1 0 0 #2 #1 #0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Cause An emergency stop signal was supplied. An external reset signal was supplied. A reset & rewind signal was supplied. The reset button was pressed. A servo alarm occurred. A feed hold signal was supplied, or the mode was switched.
10
100

The details about digital servo alarm No. 4n4 are indicated by diagnose numbers 720 to 727 in the order of the Xaxis, Y (Z) axis, Z (C, PMC) axis, fourth (Y, PMC) axis, fifth to eighth axes.
DGNOS No. 720 to 727 #7 OVL #6 LV #5 OVC #4 HCAL #3 HVAL #2 DCAL #1 FBAL #0 OFAL
OFAL: FBAL: DCAL: HVAL: HCAL: OVC: LV: OVL:
An overflow alarm occurred. A wire breakage alarm occurred. A regenerative discharge alarm occurred. An overvoltage alarm occurred. An abnormal current alarm occurred. An overcurrent alarm occurred. A lowvoltage alarm occurred. An overload alarm occurred.
The details of a serial pulse coder alarm No. 3n9 (n is an axis number, pulse coder alarm) are indicated by diagnose numbers 760 to 767 in the order of axis number.
#7 760 to 767 #6 #5 BLAL #4 PHAL #3 SCAL #2 BZAL #1 #0
SRFLG CSAL
CKAL SPHAL
SRFLG: This is not an alarm bit. It is set to 1 when a serial pulse coder is connected, or to 0 when a conventional pulse coder is connected. SPHAL: An abnormal software phase data alarm occurred. The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is probably defective. Replace it if necessary. CKAL: BZAL: A clock alarm occurred. The serial pulse coder is probably defective. Replace it if necessary. A battery zero alarm occurred (alarm No. 3n6). The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time. Make sure that the battery is connected, and turn the power off and on again, then make a return to the zero point. An abnormal rotation speed count alarm occurred. The serial pulse coder is probably defective. Replace it if necessary. An abnormal phase data alarm occurred. The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is probably defective. Replace it if necessary. A low battery voltage alarm occurred (alarm No.3n7). The battery voltage is too low. Replace the battery. A check sum alarm occurred. The serial pulse coder is probably defective. Replace it if necessary.
RCAL: PHAL: BLAL: CSAL:
101
The details of a serial pulse coder alarm No. 3n9 (n is an axis number, communication alarm) are indicated by diagnose numbers 770 to 777 in the order of axis number.
#7 770 to 777 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DTERR CRCERR STBERR
DTERR:
A data error occurred.
CRCERR: A CRC error occurred. STBERR: A stop bit error occurred. The probable causes of the above errors include a defective pulse coder, feedback cable, and feedback receive circuit. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC axis board. Position error display (DGNOS numbers 800 to 807)
800 to 807 SVERRn (n is an axis number)
The amount of position error for axis n is indicated. NOTE For the 0TT, the positional deviation for the first and second axes of the subtool post are indicated by 800 and 801 for the subtool post. Machine position relative to the reference position (DGNOS numbers 820 to 825)
820 to 827 ABSMTn (n is an axis number.)
This machine position is also displayed on the position display page. NOTE For the 0TT, the machine position for the first and second axes of the subtool post are indicated by 820 and 821 for the subtool post.
10
102

7.2 I/O Signal Status Display between CNC and PMC or Machine Tool
X016 to X022 Series 0 Y048 to Y053 MT
[For CNC without PMC]
[For CNC with PMC]

G100 or later X000 or later
Series 0
F148 or later
PMC
Y048 or later
MT
[For 0TTC]
G100 or later
0TTC
Tool post #1 Tool post #2
X000 or later F148 or later G1300 or later F1348 or later
PMCM
Y048 or later
MT
7.2.1
I/O signal list
Symbol in column of T series or M series f : Available F l : Available only 0GSC/0GCC Space
: :
Available only 0TTC Unavailable
Symbol
*+EDCX, *EDCX , *+EDCZ, *EDCZ *+LX, *+LY, *+LZ, *LX, *LY, *LZ *+LZ *+MITX, *+MITY, *+MITZ, *+MIT4, *MITX, *MITY, *MITZ, *MIT4 *EDCX, *+EDCX, *EDCY, *+EDCY, *EDCZ, *+EDCZ *ABSM *AOV16, *AOV32, *AOV64, *AOV128 *AOVR16, *AOVR32, *AOVR64, *AOVR128 *BECLP *BEUCP *DECX, *DECY, *DECZ, *DEC4,
Signal name
External deceleration signal Over travel limit signal Over travel limit signal Interlock signal for each axis and direction External deceleration signal Manual absolute signal 1% step override sigg nal Baxis clamp completion signal Baxis unclamp completion signal Deceleration signal for reference position return
T
f
PMC address
G138.0, G138.3, G138.1, G138.4
f f
X020.0, X020.1, X020.2, X020.3, X020.4, X020.5 X018.5 G142.0, G142.1, G142.2, G142.3, G142.4, G142.5, G142.6, G142.7 G138.3, G138.0, G138.4, G138.1, G138.5, G138.2 G127.2 G116.4, G116.5, G116.6, G117.6 G140.4, G140.5, G140.6, G140.7
f f f f f f f f
G143.7 G143.6 X016.5, X017.5, X018.5, X019.5
103
Symbol
*DECX, *DECZ, *DEC3, *DEC4,
Signal name
Deceleration signal for reference position return Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control) Emergency stop signal Emergency stop signal of spindle Followup signal Interlock signal Interlock signal for each axis Ladder display signal Override signal Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control ) Highspeed interlock signal Spindle clamp completion signal Automatic operation hold signal Spindle stop signal Individual spindle stop signal Spindle unclamp completion signal Jog feed axis select signal (software opero erators panel signal) Feed axis direction select signal Software limit external setting Interlock signal for each axis direction
T
f
PMC address
X016.5, X017.5, X018.5, X019.5
*EAXSL
f f f f
f f
F188.7
*ESP, *ESP *ESPA, *ESPB *FLWU *ILK *ITX, *ITY, *ITZ, *IT4 *LDSP *OV1, *OV2, *OV4, *OV8 *OV1E, *OV2E, *OV4E, *OV8E, *OV16E *RILK *SCPF *SP *SSTP *SSTP1, *SSTP2, *SSTP3 *SUCPF +3O , 3O +4O, 4O +4, 4 +LMX, +LMY, +LMZ, LMX, LMY, LMZ +MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2, MIT2 +X, X, +Z, Z
X021.4, G121.4 G230.1, G234.1
f f f
G104.5 G117.0 G128.0, G128.1, G128.2, G128.3 G119.0 G121.0, G121.1, G121.2, G121.3 G147.0, G147.1, G147.2, G147.3, G147.4 X008.5 G123.5
f f f
f f f f
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
G121.5 G120.6 G145.3, G145.4, G145.5 G123.4
7
F177.4, F177.5 F177.6, F177.7 G119.2, G119.3 G129.0, G129.1, G129.2, G129.3, G129.4, G129.5 X008.2, X008.3 X008.4, X008.5 G116.2, G116.3, G117.2, G117.3 f G116.2, G116.3, G117.3, G117.2, G118.3, G118.2 F177.0, F177.1, F177.2, F177.3, F177.4, F177.5 F177.0, F177.1, F177.2, F177.3 f X004.7 G103.7 F149.0 F281.0, F285.0
+X, X, Y, +Y, Z, +Z
Feed axis direction select signal
+XO, XO, +YO, YO, +ZO, ZO +XO, XO, +ZO, ZO 4NG AFL AL ALMA, ALMB
10
Jog feed axis select g ( signal (software operators panel signal) 4 axes disable signal Miscellaneous function lock signal CNC alarm signal Spindle alarm signal
f f
f f
f f f
104

Symbol
AR0 to AR15 ARSTA, ARSTB B0 to B31 B11 to B38 BAL BAL1 to BAL4, BAL7, BAL8 BAL1 to BAL4, BAL7, BAL8 BCLP BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9
Signal name
Actual spindle speed signal Alarm reset signal 2nd auxiliary y function signal Battery alarm Absolute pulse coder battery alarm B axis clamp signal Optional block skip signal Optional block skip signal (software operators panel signal) B code strobe signal B code strobe signal 2nd auxiliary function completion signal 2nd auxiliary function completion signal Background busy signal Interference check invalid alarm signal B axis unclamp signal Chamfering signal Spindle switch completion signal Power line switch signal Drawing signal Cs contour control change signal Spindle command signal Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) Cutting feed signal Distribution end signal Passed point output signal Renewal disable signal of relative coordinate DNC signal by data from MMC DNC operation select signal Dry run signal
T
f f f
PMC address
F158.0 to F159.7
f f
G230.0, G234.0 F276.0 to F279.7 F155.0 to F154.3 F149.2 F156.0 to F156.5
f f
f f f f f f f f f F f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
F159.0 to F159.5 F188.3 G116.0, G141.0 to G141.7 F176.4 F150.7 F150.7, F150.6 G115.7 G115.7, G115.6 F180.4 F180.6 F188.2 G126.7 F282.1, F286.1 F282.0, F286.0 F164.5 G123.0 G123.7 F180.5 G229.3, G229.2 F188.6 F149.3 F149.6
BDTO BF BF1, BF2 BFIN BFIN1, BFIN2 BGEACT BOFF BUCLP CDZ CFINA, CFINB CHPA, CHPB CKGRP COFF CON COSP CTH1A, CTH2A CUT DEN DEN2
DLK
G127.6
DMMC DNCI DRN
G128.7 G127.5 G118.7
105
Symbol
DRNE
Signal name
Dry run signal (PMC axis control ) Dry run signal (software operators panel signal) Manual data input start signal Address signal (for external data input) Control axis select signal (PMC axis control ) Command read completion signal (PMC axis control ) Command read signal (PMC axis control ) Axis control command signal (PMC axis control ) Following zero checking signal(PMC axis control ) Reset signal (PMC axis control ) Data signal (for external data input) Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control ) External operation signal External operation signal for highspeed interface External operation completion signal for highspeed interface Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control ) Axis moving signal (PMC axis control ) Alarm signal (PMC axis control ) Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) Inposition signal (PMC axis control) Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
T
f f f
M
f f f f
PMC address
G147.7
DRNO
F176.7
DST EA0 to EA6
F150.5 G102.0 to G102.6
EAX1 to EAX8
G144.0 to G144.5
3
f f f f f f F270.7, F273.7
EBSYA, EBSYB
EBUFA, EBUFB EC0A to EC7A, EC0B to EC7B
G210.7, G218.7 G211.0 to G211.7, G219.0 to G219.7
ECKZA, ECZKB
f f f f
f f f f f f
F270.1, F273.1
ECLRA, ECLRB ED0 to ED15
G210.6, G218.6 G100.0 to G101.7
6
F270.3, F273.3
EDENA, EDENB
EF
F150.0
7
F150.1
EFD
EFIN
G115.1
8
f f f f f f f f G210.0, G218.0
EFINA, EFINB
EGENA, EGENB EIALA, EIALB EID0A to EID31A, EID0B to EID31B EIF0A to EIF15A, EIF0B to EIF15B EINPA, EINPB EM11A to EM28A, EM11B to EM28B
F270.4, F273.4
9
F270.2, F273.2 G214.0 to G217.7, G222.0<G225.7 G212.0 to G213.7, G220.0 to G221.7 F270.0, F273.0 F272.0 to F272.7, F275.0 to F275.7
10
f f f
f f f
EMFA, EMFB
F271.0, F274.0
106

Symbol
EMSBKA, EMSBKB ENB ENB2, ENB3 ENBKY Spindle enable signal External key input mode select signal Negativedirection overtravel signal (PMC axis control) Positivedirection overtravel signal (PMC axis control) Override 0% signal (PMC axis control ) Read completion signal (for external data input) External reset signal Block stop signal (PMC axis control ) Search completion signal (for external data input) Skip signal (PMC axis control ) Servo off signal (PMC axis control ) Simple spindle synchronous control signal Read signal (for external data input) Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control ) Stored stroke limit select signal External read start signal External read/punch stop signal External punch start signal F1digit feed select signal M, S, T, B function completion signal Cs contour control change completion signal Serial spindle phase synchronous completion signal Serial spindle synchronous mode signal f f f f f f f f f f
Signal name
Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control)
T
f f f f f
M
f f
PMC address
F211.0, G219.0 F149.4 F149.4, F164.2, F164.3
f f
G134.0
EOTNA, EOTNB
F270.6, F273.6
EOTPA, EOTPB
f f f f f f
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
F270.5, F273.5
EOV0
F188.5
EREND ERS ESBKA, ESBKB
F160.0 G121.7 G210.3, G218.3
ESEND
F160.1
ESKIP ESOFA, ESOFB
X008.6 G210.4, G218.4
ESRSYC
G104.4
ESTB
G102.7
ESTPA, ESTPB
G210.5, G218.5
EXLMZ EXRD EXSTP EXWT F1D FIN
G129.6 G134.1 G134.2 G134.3 G140.7 G120.3
FSCSL
F178.1
FSPPH
F178.3
FSPSY
F178.2
107
Symbol
FXST GOQSM GR1, GR2 GR1, GR2 GR1O, GR2O, GR3O GR21 GR31
Signal name
Canned cycle start signal Offset write mode signal Gear select signal Gear select signal 2nd spindle gear select signal 3rd spindle gear select signal Automatic grinding wheel diameter compensation software operators panel signal Manual handle interruption ru tion axis select signal
M
f
PMC address
F161.4 G132.7 G118.2, G118.3
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
G123.2, G123.3 G152.0, G152.1, G152.2 G145.6 G145.7
GWLF
F165.3
H4O HIX, HIY, HIZ, HI4 HIX, HIZ, HI3, HI4 HX, HY, HZ, H4 HX, HZ, H3, H4 HXO, HYO, HZO HXO, HZO, H3O, H4O IGNVRY IGNVRY INDXA, INDXB
F174.7 G126.0, G126.1, G126.2, G126.3 G126.0, G126.1, G126.2, G126.3 G116.7, G117.7, G118.7, G119.7 G116.7, G117.7, G118.7, G119.7 F174.4, F174.5, F174.6 F174.4, F174.5, F174.6, F174.7 G127.0 G123.0 G231.0, G235.0
Handle feed axis select signal
Manual pulse generator feed axis select signal (software operators panel signal) VREADY check sigg nal Spindle orientation stop position change signal Infeed control cutting start signal Key input disable signal Inposition signal Interlock signal for each axis Jog feedrate override signal Jog feedrate override signal (software operators panel signal) Feedrate override signal (software operators panel signal)
INFD INHKY INP1 to INP4 ITX, ITZ, IT3, IT4 JOV1 to JOV8 JV1O, JV2O, JV4O, JV8O
G237.6 F180.0 F184.0 to F184.3 G128.0, G128.1, G128.2, G128.3 G104.0 to G104.3 F175.0, F175.1, F175.2, F175.3
10
JV1O to JV8O
F175.0 to F175.3
108

Symbol
K0, S, K1, U, K2, W, K3, R, K4, X, K5, Z, K6, F, K7, 0, K8, N, K9, G, KA, C, KALARM, KALTER, KCAN, KCUS, KCUS, KDELET, KDGNOS, KEOB
Signal name
PMC address
G106.0, G106.1, G106.2, G106.3, G106.4, G106.5, G106.6, G106.7, G107.0, G107.1, G107.5, G109.5, G108.0, G110.7, G110.1, G110.0, G108.2, G109.4, G107.7 G114.3, G114.2, G113.2, G114.0, G114.1, G114.7, G114.4, G113.1, G113.0, G113.3, G114.5, G114.6, G113.6, G113.7, G113.4, G113.5, G107.6 G108.3, G108.1, G107.2, G107.4, G110.3, G110.2, G109.3, G109.0, G109.1, G111.7, G112.6, G112.5, G112.4, G112.3, G112.2, G112.7, G112.1, G108.4, G107.3, G142.7, G110.4 G106.0, G106.1, G106.2, G106.3, G106.4, G106.5, G106.6, G106.7, G107.0, G107.1, G109.5, G108.0, G107.5, G110.7, G110.1, G110.0, G108.2, G109.4, G107.7 G113.7, G114.3, G114.2, G113.2, G114.0, G114.1, G114.7, G114.4, G113.1, G113.0, G113.3, G114.5, G114.6, G113.4, G113.6, G113.5, G107.6, G108.3, G108.1, G107.2, G109.2, G107.4, G110.3, G110.2, G109.3, G109.0, G109.1, G111.7, G112.6, G112.5, G112.4, G112.3, G112.2, G112.7, G112.1, G108.4, G107.3, G110.4, G110.6, G110.5 G122.3
KFF, KFFE, KFGB, KFI,, KFK%, KFL+, KFM., KFN), KFO (, KFRC, KFS=, KFT*, KFUV, KFWH, KFXY, KFZJ, KH, I, K
KINPUT, KINSRT, KM, , KP, Q, KPAGE , KPAGE , KPARAM, KPOS, KPROGRM, KRESET, KS1, KS2, KS3, KS4, KS5, KSL, KSR, KSTART, KT,., KXZ, KXZ Key signal K0, S, K1, H, K2, F, K3, R, K4, X, K5, Y, K6, Z, K7, 0, K8, N, K9, G, KALARM, KALTER, KB, K4, D, KCAN, KCUS, KCUS, KDELET, KDGNOS, KEOB, / , .
KF4TH, KFF, KFF%, KFGE, KFI,, KFJA, KFL+, KFM., KFN), KFO (, KFRC, KFS=, KFT*, KFXU, KFXW, KFYV, KH, J, K, KINPUT, KINSRT, KM, , KOFSET, KP, Q, L, KPAGE, KPAGE, KPARAM, KPOS, KPROGRM, KRESET, KS1, KS2, KS3, KS4, KS5, KSL, KSR, KSTART, KT,., KXY, KYZ, KZX
KEY
Program protect signal Program protect signal (software operators panel signal)
f f
f f
KEYO
F178.5
109
Symbol
KILPLUS KOFSET LDT1A, LDT1B, LDT2A, LDT2B M00, M01, M02, M30
Signal name
Position coder return direction select signal External key input Load detection signal M decode signal
T
f f f
M
f
PMC address
G105.6 G109.2
f f
F281.4, F285.4, F281.5, F285.5 F154.7, F154.6, F154.5, F154.4 F151.0, F151.1, F151.2, F151.3, F151.4, F151.5, F151.6, F151.7, F157.0, F157.1, F157.2, F157.3 F193.0, F193.1, F193.2, F193.3, F193.4, F193.5, F193.6, F193.7, F194.0, F194.1, F194.2, F194.3 F194.4, F194.5, F194.6, F194.7, F195.0, F195.1, F195.2, F195.3, F195.4, F195.5, F195.6, F195.7 F149.7 G230.3, G234.3 G122.0, G122.1, G122.2 F174.0, F174.1, F174.2
M11, M12, M14, M18, M21, M22, M24, M28, M31, M32, M34, M38
Miscellaneous function code signal
M211, M212, M214, M218, M221, M222, M224, M228, M231, M232, M234, M238
2nd M function code signal
M311, M312, M314, M318, M321, M322, M324, M328, M331, M332, M334, M338 MA MCFNA, MCFNB MD1, MD2, MD4
3rd M function code signal
CNC ready signal Power line switch completion signal Mode select signal Mode select signal (software operators panel signal) Miscellaneous function strobe signal 2nd or 3rd M function strobe signal Miscellaneous function completion signal 2nd M function completion signal 3rd M function completion signal External program g input start signal
f f f f f f f f f
f f f f
MD1O, MD2O, MD4O
7
F150.0 F157.4, F157.5 f f f f f f f
MF MF2, MF3
MFIN
G115.0
MFIN2 MFIN3 MINP MINP MIRX, MIRY, MIR4
G134.4 G134.5 G120.0 G117.0 G127.0, G127.1, G127.7 G120.0, G127.1
Mirror image g signal g MIX, MIZ MLK Allaxis machine lock signal Machine lock signal (software operators panel signal) Mirror image check signal
10
f f f
f f f f
G117.1
MLKO MMI1, MMI2 MMI1, MMI2, MMI4
F176.6 F158.0, F158.1 F158.0, F158.1, F158.3,
110

Symbol
MP1, MP2 MP1, MP2
Signal name
Manual handle feed amount select signal Select of magnification of manual pulse generator (software operators panel signal) Machine ready signal (serial spindle) Axis moving signal Nowait signal Angular axis control Z axis offset moving signal Shortdistant movement command while changing the orientation stop position signal Tool offset number select signal of tool offset measurement direct input Automatic operation signal Spindle orientation completion signal Orientation command signal Software operators panel generalpurpose switch signal Feedrate override signal (software operators panel signal) Override cancel signal PMC axis override cancel signal 2nd position coder select signal Output switching completion signal Output switching signal Synchronous control parking signal 1st spindle parking signal 2nd spindle parking signal Position coder return control signal Workpiece number search signal
T
f
M
f
PMC address
G118.0, G119.0 G120.0, G120.1
MP1O, MP2O
F175.6, F175.7
MRDYA, MRDYB MVX, MVY, MV3, MV4 MVX, MVY, MVZ, MV4 NOWT NOZAGC NOZAGC
f f
G229.7, G233.7 F148.4 to F148.7
f F l l
F148.4 to F148.7 G133.1 G133.6 G237.5
NRROA, NRROB
G231.2, G235.2
OFN0, OFN1, OFN2, OFN3, OFN4
G132.0, G132.1, G132.2, G132.3, G132.4 f f f f F148.7 F281.7, F285.7 G229.6, G233.6
OP ORARA, ORARB ORCMA, ORCMB
f f f f
OUT0 to OUT7
F171.0 to F171.7
OV1O, OV2O, OV4O, OV8O OVC OVCE PC2SLC PCFNA, PCFNB PCHPA, PCHPB PK1M, PK2M, PK3M, PK4M, PK5M, PK6M PKESS1 PKESS2 PLCRVON PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8
f f f f f f f f f f f
f f f
F176.0, F176.1, F176.2, F176.3 G126.4 G147.5 G146.7
f f
F280.3, F282.3, F282.3, F286.3 F280.2, F282.2, F282.2, F286.2 G238.0, G238.1, G238.2, G238.3, G238.4, G238.5
f f f f
G138.6 G138.7 G105.7 G122.4, G122.5, G122.6, G122.7
111
Symbol
PRC PRGDPL PRTSF PSW01 to PSW10 PSYN PX0 to PX7, PZ0 to PZ7 R01O to R12O RCHA, RCHB RGSPM, RGSPP RGTAP, RGTPN RGTPN RGTSP1, RGTSP2 RLSOT RMTDI0 to RMTDI7 RMTDO0 to RMTDO7 RMTDO0 to RMTDO7 RO1I to R12I, RO1I2 to R12I2, RO1I3 to R12I3
Signal name
Position record signal Program screen display signal Required parts count reached signal Position switch signal Polygon machining inprogress signal Position signal output S12bit code signal Power line status check signal Spindle rotation direction signal Rigid tapping signal Rigid tapping spindle select signal Software limit external setting Remote buffer input signal Remote buffer output signal Motor speed command spindle input signal Spindle rotation direction command signal while changing the orientation stop position Rapid traverse override signal Rapid traverse override B signal PMC axis rapid traverse override signal Rapid traverse override signal (software operators panel signal) Read/punch alarm signal Read/punch inprogress signal Rewind signal Output switch request signal Serial spindle synchronous polygon signal Reset signal
T
f f f f f f f f
PMC address
G103.6
f f f
F180.1 F164.7 F190, F191.0, F191.1 F160.7 F165.0 to F165.7, F167.0 to F167.7
f f f f
F172.0 to F173.3 G230.7, G234.7 F165.1, F165.0 G135.0, G123.1 G123.1 G061.4, G061.5 G129.7 G239.0 to G239.7 F290.0 to F290.7 F289.0 to F289.7
f f
f f f
f f
f f f
G124.0 to G125.3, G106.0 to G107.3, G108.0 to G109.3
ROTAA, ROTAB
G231.1, G235.1
ROV1, ROV2 ROV1D, ROV2D, ROV3D ROV1E, ROV2E
f f f f
G116.7, G117.7 G116.4, G116.5, G116.6 G146.0, G146.1
ROV1O, ROV2O
F175.4, F175.5
RPALM RPBSY RRW RSLA, RSLB
f f f f F f
f f f f
F180.3 F180.2 G104.6 G230.6, G234.6
10
RSMAX RST
F189.7 f F149.1
112

Symbol
RT
Signal name
Manual rapid traverse select signal Manual rapid traverse select signal (PMC axis control ) Jog rapid traverse select signal (software operators panel signal) Rewinding signal Spindle function code signal Servo ready completion signal Spindle speed reached signal Speed reached sigg nal Single block signal Single block signal (software operators panel signal) Spindle synchronous polygon mode signal for 0TTC Spindle clamp signal Speed detection sigg nal Spindle function strobe signal Spindle function completion signal Spindle CW command signal Spindle motor command polarity select signal 1st spindle orientation external stop position command signal 2nd spindle orientation external stop position command signal Spindle analog voltage control signal Spindle motor speed command signal Skip signal Z axis manual handle select signal
T
f f
M
f
PMC address
G121.6
RTE
G147.6
RTO
f f f
f f f
F178.6
RWD S11, S12, S14, S18, S21, S22, S24, S28
F164.6 F152.0, F152.1, F152.2, F152.3, F152.4, F152.5, F152.6, F152.7 F148.6 G120.4 F281.3, F285.3 F281.3, F285.3
SA SAR SARA, SARB SARA, SARB SBK SBKO
f f
f f f
f f f f f
G116.1 F176.5
SBRT SCLP SDTA, SDTB SDTA, SDTB SF SFIN SFRA, SFRB
F f f f f f f f f f f f
G146.6 F164.0 F281.2, F285.2 F281.2, F285.2 F150.2 G115.2 G229.5, G233.5 G125.5, G107.5, G109.5
SGN, SGN2, SGN3
SHA00 to SHA11
G110.0 to G110.7, G111.0 to G111.3
SHB00 to SHB11
G112.0 to G112.7, G113.0 to G113.3
SIGN SIND, SIND2, SIND3 SKIP SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 SLHZ0, SLHZ1
f f f f f f
G125.7 G125.7, G107.7, G109.7 X008.7 X008.2, X008.3, X008.4 G133.0, G133.1
113
Symbol
SLPCA, SLPCB
Signal name
Spindle return select signal Spindle analog voltage output select signal Error detect signal Soft start /stop cancel signal Spindle orientation signal Spindle speed override signal Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal Signal by axis moving speed Automatic operation halt signal Feed hold signal (software operators panel signal) Serial spindle phase synchronous mode signal Spindle select signal Spindle stop completion signal Serial spindle synchronous mode signal Program restart signal Program restart under way signal Spindle CCW command signal Spindle motor command polarity select signal Speed zero detection signal Automatic operation start lamp signal Automatic operation start signal Start lock signal Input and run simultaneous mode select signal Output and run simultaneous mode select signal Spindle unclamp completion signal
T
f f f f f
PMC address
G1333.2, G1333.3
SLSPA, SLSPB SMZ SOCNA, SOCNB SOR SPA, SPB, SPC SPA, SPB, SPC, SPD
G133.2, G133.3 G126.6 f f f G230.4, G234.4 G120.5 G103.3, G103.4, G103.5 G103.3, G103.4, G103.5, G103.2 F154.0
f f f f f f f
SPAL SPDS1, SPDS2, SPDS3, SPDS4 SPL
4
F189.0, F189.1, F189.2, F189.3 F148.4
5
F178.7
SPO
SPPHS SPSLA, SPSLB SPSTP
f f f f f f f f f
f f
G146.3 G230.2, G234.2 G123.6
SPSYC
f f f f f
G146.2
SRN SRNMV SRVA, SRVB
G103.0 F188.4
8
G229.4, G233.4 G125.6, G107.6, G109.6 F281.1, F285.1
SSIN, SSIN2, SSIN3 SSTA, SSTB SSTA, SSTB ST STL STLK STRD
f f f f f f f
F281.1, F285.1 G120.2 F148.5 G120.1 G140.5
10
STWD
f f
G140.6
SUCLP
F164.1
114

Symbol
SVFX, SVFY, SVFZ, SVF4 SVFX, SVFZ, SVF3, SVF4 SWS1, SWS2, SWS3 SYCAL SYCAL SYN1M, SYN2M, SYN3M, SYN4M, SYN5M, SYN6M SYN1OM, SYN2OM, SYN3OM, SYN4OM, SYN5OM, SYN6OM SYNAL SYNC4 SYNCJ SYNCX, SYNCZ, SYNC3, SYNC4 T11 to T28 T11 to T48 TAL TAP TF TFIN THRD TL01, TL02, TL04, TL08, TL16, TL32, TL64 TLCH TLCHB TLCHE TLCHI TLMA, TLMB TLMA, TLMB TLMHA, TLMHB TLMLA, TLMLB TLNW Torque limit signal Highspeed torque limit signal Low speed torque limit signal New tool select signal Servo off signal f Spindle select signal Spindle synchronous control alarm signal Synchronous error detection signal Synchronous control start signal Axis recomposition signal Servo axis synchronous alarm signal Simple synchronous axis select signal Simple synchronous control signal Simple synchronous axis select signal Tool function code signal Interference alarm signal Tapping signal Tool function strobe signal Tool function completion signal Thread cutting in progress signal Tool group number signal Tool change signal Tool life reached signal Alltool life reached signal Individual tool change signal f f f f F f f f f f f f F f f f
Signal name
M
f
PMC address
G105.0, G105.1, G105.2, G105.3 G105.0, G105.1, G105.2, G105.3 G145.0, G145.1, G145.2 F178.4 F178.4 G237.0, G237.1, G237.2, G237.3, G237.4, G237.5 F189.0, F189.1, F189.2, F189.3, F189.4, F189.5
F f f f
F192.7 G237.3 G133.6 G237.0 to G237.3 F153.0 to F153.7 F153.0 to F156.7 F180.7 F149.5 F150.3 G115.3 F188.3 G139.0, G139.1, G139.2, G139.3, G139.4, G139.5, G139.6 F188.0 F192.2 F192.1 F192.0 F281.6, F285.6 F281.6, F285.6 G229.1, G233.1 G229.0, G233.0 F188.1
f f
f f f f f f f
f f f
f f f
115
Symbol
TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TNFS TORQ1, TORQ2, TORQ3, TORQ4, TORQ7, TORQ8 TRT2, TRT2PC UI000 to UI015 UINT UO000 to UO015, UO100 to UO131 WATO WNRQ WNANS WNWRT WNERR
Signal name
Tool change reset signal Individual tool change reset signal Tool skip signal Tool offset number automatic select disable signal Torque limit reached signal Tool post select signal Input signal for custom macro Interrupt signal for custom macro Output signal for custom macro Waiting signal Window request signal Window completion signal Window write signal Window error signal Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal Measuring position reached signal Measuring position reached signal Automatic tool offset function signal Automatic tool offset function signal Z axis command cancel signal
T
f
M
f f
PMC address
G139.7 G140.4 G140.0 G132.5 F170.0, F170.1, F170.2, F170.3, F170.4, F170.5 X018.3, G133.0
f f
f F f f f F f f f f f f f f f f f f
G130.0 to G131.7 G140.3 F162.0 to F163.7, F196.0 to F199.7 F160.6 G200.0 F250.0 G200.1 F250.1
WOQSM
G132.6
WOSET
f f f f f f f
G133.7 X008.0, X008.1, X008.2 X008.0, X008.1 X040.0 X040.1
XAE, YAE, ZAE XAE, ZAE XAES ZAES ZNG ZP2X, ZP2Y, ZP2Z, ZP24 ZP2X, ZP2Z, ZP23, ZP24 ZP3X, ZP3Y, ZP3Z, ZP34 ZP3X, ZP3Z, ZP33, ZP34
9
G103.6 F161.0, F161.1, F161.2, F161.3, F166.6, F166.7 F161.0, F161.1, F161.2, F161.3, F166.6, F166.7 f F169.0, F169.1, F169.2, F169.3, F166.0, F166.1 F169.0, F169.1, F169.2, F169.3, F166.0, F166.1
2nd reference position return com completion letion signal
10
3rd reference position return completion com letion signal
116

Symbol
ZP4X, ZP4Y, ZP4Z, ZP44 ZP4X, ZP4Z, ZP43, ZP44
Signal name
4th reference position return completion com letion signal
M
f
PMC address
F169.4, F169.5, F169.6, F169.7, F166.2, F166.3 F169.4, F169.5, F169.6, F169.7, F166.2, F166.3
ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4
ZPX, ZPZ, ZP3, ZP4 ZRFX, ZRFY, ZRFZ, ZRF4 ZRFX, ZRFZ, ZRF3, ZRF4 ZRN
Reference position return completion com letion signal
F148.0, F148.1, F148.2, F148.3, F166.4, F166.5 F148.0, F148.1, F148.2, F148.3, F166.4, F166.5
f f f f f
Reference position establishment signal Manual reference position return select signal Mode select signal (software operators panel signal)
F168.0, F168.1, F168.2, F168.3 F168.0, F168.1, F168.2, F168.3 G120.7
ZRNO
F174.3
117
Address list (for M series)

7.2.2 Address list

MTPMC #7
X004 4NG
1
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#6
#5
2
X008 SKIP ESKIP *RILK ZAE YAE XAE
X016
*DECX
*DEC5S *DEC7
X017
*DECY
*DEC6S *DEC8
X018
*DECZ
X019
*DEC4
X020
* LZ
* LY
* LX
*+ LZ
*+ LY
*+ LX
X021
*ESP
PMCCNC #7
G100 ED7
6
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
#4
ED4
#3
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
G101
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED09
ED08
G102
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
G103
AFL
ZNG
SPC
SPB
SPA
SRN
G104
RRW *FLWU ESRSYC JOV8
JOV4
JOV2
JOV1
G105
SVF8
SVF7
SVF4
SVFZ
SVFY
SVFX
G106
K7, 0
K6, Z
K5, Y
K4, X
K3, R
K2, F
K1, H
K0, S
10
G107
KEOB,I,#
KH,J,K KB,K4,D KP,Q, L
KT,.
KM,
K9, G
K8, N
G108
KSTART KINPUT KDELET KINSRT KALTER
G109
KALARM KDGNOS KPARAM KOFSET
KPROGRM
KPOS
G110
KCAN
KYZ
KZX
KXY
KPAGE KPAGE KCUS KCUS
118

G111
KRESET
G112
KSL
KS1
KS2
KS3
KS4
KS5
KSR
G113
KF4TH KFXW KFYV
KFXU
KFRC KFGE
KFN)
KFO(
G114
KFL+
KFT*
KFS=
KFM#
KFF
KFF@
KFJA
KFI,
G115
BFIN1
BFIN2
TFIN
SFIN
EFIN
MFIN
G116
HX/ROV1
AOV64 AOV32 AOV16
+X
SBK
BDT
G117
HY/ROV2
AOV128
+Y
MLK
*ILK
G118
HZ/DRN
+Z
G119
H4
+4
*LDSP
G120
ZRN
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
FIN
ST
MP2
MP1/MINP
G121
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
G122
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
G123
CON
RTNT MSPC RTRCT
GR2
GR1
RGTPN IGNVRY
G124
RO8I
RO7I
RO6I
RO5I
RO4I
RO3I
RO2I
RO1I
G125
SIND
SSIN
SGN
R12I
R11I
R10I
RO9I
G126
OVC
HI4
HIZ
HIY
HIX
G127
MIR4
DLK
DNCI
*ABSM
MIRY
MIRX
G128
DMMC
*IT4
*ITZ
*ITY
*ITX
G129
RLSOT EXLM2 LMZ
LMY
LMX
+LMZ
+LMY +LMX
G130
UI7
UI6
UI5
UI4
UI3
UI2
UI1
UI0
G131
UI15
UI14
UI13
UI12
UI11
UI10
UI9
UI8
G132
BGEN BGIALM BGION
IOLACK
119

G133
SYNCJ ROV4
ROV3
SLHZ1 SLHZ0
1
G134
MFIN3 MFIN2
EXWT EXSTP EXRD ENBKY
G135
RGTAP
2
G136
G137
3
G138
PKESS2 PKESS1 *EDCZ *EDCY *EDCX *+EDCZ *+EDCY *+EDCX
G139
TLRST
TL64
TL32
TL16
TL08
TL04
TL02
TL01
G140
F1D
STWD STRD TLRSTI UNIT
TL256
TL128 TLSKP
G141
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
BDT4
BDT3
BDT2
G142
*MIT4 *MITZ *MITY *MITX *+MIT4 *+MITZ *+MITY *+MITX
G143
*BECLP *BEUCP
*JV16
*JV8
*JV4
*JV2
*JV1
G144
EAX8
EAX7
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
G145
7
SPPHS SPSYC ROV1E ROV2E
G146
G147
DRNE
RTE
OVCE *OV16E *OV8E *OV4E *OV2E *OV1E
CNCPMC #7
F148 OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
ZP4
#2
ZPZ/EF
#1
ZPY
#0
ZPX
F149
MA
DEN2
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
10
F150 BF1 BF2 DST TF SF EFD MF F151
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
F152
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14/GR3O S12/GR2OS11/GR1O
F153
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
120

F154
M00
M01
M02
M30
B38
B34
B32
B31
F155
B28
B24
B22
B21
B18
B14
B12
B11
F156
T48
T44
T42
T41
T38
T34
T32
T31
F157
MF3
MF2
M38
M34
M32
M31
F158
F159
BAL6
BAL5
BAL4
BAL3
BAL2
BAL1
F160
ESEND EREND
F161
FXST
ZP24
ZP2Z
ZP2Y
ZP2X
F162
U07
U06
U05
U04
U03
U02
U01
U00
F163
U15
U14
U13
U12
U11
U10
U09
U08
F164
PRTSF
RWD CKGRP
F165
HOBSYN
MSPCF RTRCTF GWLF
RGSPM RGSPP
F166
ZP28
ZP27
ZP8
ZP7
ZP48
ZP47
ZP38
ZP37
F167
F168
TORQL
ZRF4
ZRFZ
ZRFY
ZRFX
F169
ZP44
ZP4Z
ZP4Y
ZP4X
ZP34
ZP3Z
ZP3Y
ZP3X
F170
F171
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
OUT4
OUT3 OUT2
OUT1 OUT0
F172
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
F173
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
F174
H4O
HZO
HYO
HXO
ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F175
MP2O
MP1O ROV2O ROV1O JV8O
JV4O
JV2O
JV1O
121

F176
DRNO MLKO SBKO
BDTO
OV8O OV4O
OV2O OV1O
1
F177 4O +4O ZO +ZO YO +YO XO +XO F178
SPO
RTO
KEYO SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
2
F179 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK
F180
PECK2
BGEACT
RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY
3
F181
SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0
F182
4
F183
F184
MV4
MV3
MVZ
MVX
INP4
INP3
INPZ
INPX
F185
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
F186
S48
S44
S42
S41
S38
S34
S32
S31
F187
S58
S54
S52
S51
F188
*EAXSL
CUT
EOV0
SRNMV
BCLP BUCLP TLNW TLCH
F189
SPDS4 SPDS3 SPDS2 SPDS1
F190
F191
F192
SYNAL RTPT
TLCHB TLCHE TLCHI
F193
M228
M224
M222
M221
M218
M214
M212
M211
10
F194 M318 M314 M312 M311 M238 M234 M232 M231 F195
M338
M334
M332
M331
M328
M324
M322
M321
F196
UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100
F197
122

F198
F199
PMCCNC #7
G200 to G209 PMC window DI
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DI
G210
EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA
EFINA
G211
EC7A
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G212
EIF7A
EIF6A EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A EIF2A
EIF1A EIF0A
G213
EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G214
EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
G215
EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G216
G217
G218
EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB
EFINB
G219
EC7B
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G220
EIF7B
EIF6B EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B EIF2B
EIF1B EIF0B
G221
EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
G222
EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B
EID3B EID2B EID1B
EID0B
G223
EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B
EID8B
G224
EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B
G225
G226
123

G227
1
G228
G229
MRDYA ORCMA SFRA
SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
2
G230 RCHA RSLA
SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G231
NRROA ROTAA INDXA
3
G232
G233
MRDYB ORCMB SFRB
SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234
RCHB
RSLB
SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G235
NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G236
G237
INFD
SYNC4
G238
G239
RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0
G240 to G249
Operators panel DI
8
Operators panel DI
PMCCNC #7
F250 to F269
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DO
10
PMC window DO
F270
EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EFENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F271
EMFA
F272
EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
124

F273
EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F274
EMFB
F275
EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
F276
F277
F278
F279
F280
F281
ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA
SSTA ALMA
F282
PCFNA PCHPA CFINA CHPA
F283
F284
F285
ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB
SSTB ALMB
F286
PCFNB PCHPB CFINB CHOB
F287
F288
F289
F290
RMTDO7 RMTDO6 RMTDO5 RMTDO4 RMTDO3 RMTDO2 RMTDO1 RMTDO0
F291 to F299
Operators panel DO
Operators panel DO
125
Address list (for T series)

MTPMC #7
X008 SKIP SKIP
1
#6 #5
MIT2 SKIP4 SKIP3
#4
#3
#2
#1
ZAE
#0
XAE
+MIT2 MIT1 +MIT1 SKIP2 ZAE XAE
.Lower stage for 0GC

X016 *DEC3 *DECX *DEC5S *DEC7
.By parameter setting

X017 *DEC4 *DECZ *DEC6S *DEC8

X018 *ESPS *+LZ TRT2
X019
*DEC3
*DEC4

X020
X021
*ESP
6
PMCCNC #7
G100 ED7
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
#4
ED4
#3
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
7
G101 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8
G102
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
8
G103 AFL PRC SPC SPB SPA SPD SRN
G104
RRW *FLWU ESRSYC
9
G105
PLCRVON KILPLUS
SVF8
SVF7
SVF4
SVF3
SVFZ
SVFX
G106
K7, 0
K6, F
K5, Z
M2R06I
K4, X
M2R05I
K3,R
M2R04I
K2, W
K1, U
K0, S
M2R01I
10
M2R08I M2R07I
M2R03I M2R02I
G107
KEOB KH, I, K KA, C

M2SIND M2SGN
KP, Q
KT,.
KM,
K9, G
K8, N
M2R12I M2R11I M2R10I M2R09I
G108
M3R08I M3R07I M3R06I
KSTART KINPUT KDELET KINSRT KALTER M3R05I M3R04I M3R03I M3R02I MSR01I
126

G109
KALARM KDGNOS KPARAM KOFSET M3SIND M3SSIN M3SGN M3R12I M3R11I
KPROGRM
KPOS
M3R10I M3R09I
G110
KCAN
KXZ
SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G111
KRESET
SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G112
KSL
KS1
KS2
KS3
KS4
KS5
KSR
SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
G113
KFWH
KFUV
KFZJ
KFXY
KFRC
KFGB
KFN)
KFO(
SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G114
KFL+
KFT*
KFS=
KFM#
KFF
KFFE KFK@
KFI,
G115
BFIN
TFIN
SFIN
MFIN
G116
HX/ROV1
ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D
+X
SBK
BDT
G117
HZ/ROV2
+Z
MLK
MP1/MINP
G118
DRN H3
GR2 3
GR1 +3
MP2 MP2
.Lower stage by parameter setting

G119 H4 4 +4 *LDSP
G120
ZRN
*SSTP SOR
SAR
FIN
ST
STLK
MIX
G121
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
G122
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
G123 DRN
SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF
RGTPN COFF
GR2
GR1
COFF
.Lower stage by parameter setting

G124 RO8I RO7I RO6I RO5I RO4I RO3I RO2I RO1I
G125
SIND
SSIN
SGN
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
127

G126
CDZ
SMZ
*OV16
OVC
HI4
HI3
HIZ
HIX
1
G127 DLK DNCI
*ABSM
MIZ
IGNVRY
G128
DMMC
IT4
IT3
ITZ
ITX
2
G129 EXLM2
G130
UI7
UI6
UI5
UI4
UI3
UI2
UI1
UI0
3
G131 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8
G132
GOQSM WOQSM
TNFS
OFN4
OFN3 OFN2
OFN1 OFN0
G133
WOSET NOZAGC
SLSPB
SLSPA
NOWT TRT2PC
G134
MFIN3 MFIN2 EXWT EXSTP EXRD ENBKY
G135
G136
G137
G138
PKESS2 PKESS1
*EDCZ *EDCX
*+EDCZ *+EDCX
G139
TLRST
TL64
TL32
TL16
TL08
TL04
TL02
TL01
G140
AOVR128 AOVR64
AOVR32
AOVR16
UNIT
TLSKP
G141
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
BDT4
BDT3
BDT2
G142
KXZ
BGEN BGIALM BGION
9
IOLACK
G143
10
G144 EAX8 EAX7 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1 G145
GR31
GR21 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3
SWS2
SWS1
G146
PC2SLC
SBRT
SPPHS SPSYC
ROV2E ROV1E
G147
DRNE
RTE
OVCE *OV16E *OV8E *OV4E
*OV2E *OV1E
128

CNCPMC #7
F148 OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
ZP4
#2
ZP3
#1
ZPZ
#0
ZPX
F149
MA
DEN2
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
F150
BF
DST
TF
SF
MF
F151
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
F152
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
F153
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
F154
SPAL
F156
BAL6
BAL5
BAL4
BAL3
BAL2
BAL1
F157
MF3
MF2
M38
M34
M32
M31
F158
AR7
AR6
AR5
AR4
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
F159
AR15
AR14
AR13
AR12
AR11
AR10
AR9
AR8
F160
PSYN
WATO
ESEND EREND
F161
ZP24
ZP23
ZP2Z
ZP2X
F162
UO7
UO6
UO5
UO4
UO3
UO2
UO1
UO0
F163
UO15
UO14
UO13
UO12
UO11
UO10
UO9
UO8
F164
PRTSF
RWD CKGRP
ENB3
ENB2
SUCLP
SCLP
F165
PX7
PX6
PX5
PX4
PX3
PX2
PX1
PX0
F166
ZP28
ZP27
ZP8
ZP7
ZP48
ZP47
ZP38
ZP37
F167
PZ7
PZ6
PZ5
PZ4
PZ3
PZ2
PZ1
PZ0
F168
ZRF4
ZRF3
ZRFZ
ZRFX
F169
ZP44
ZP43
ZP4Z
ZP4X
ZP34
ZP33
ZP3Z
ZP3X
129

F170
TORQ8 TORQ7 TORQ4 TORQ3 TORQ2 TORQ1
1
F171 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 F172
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
2
F173 R12O R11O R10O R09O
F174
H4O
H3O
HZO
HXO
ZRNO MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
3
F175 MP2O MP1O ROV2O ROV1O JV8O JV4O JV2O JV1O
F176
DRNO MLKO SBKO
BDTO
OV8O OV4O
OV2O OV1O
F177
4O
+4 O
3O
+3O
ZO
+Z O
XO
+X O
F178
SPO
RTO
KEYO SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
F179
EDGN EPARM EVAR
EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK
F180
TAL
BOFF COSP BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY
F181
SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0
F182
F183
F184
MV4
MV3
MVZ
MVX
INP4
INP3
INPZ
INPX
F185
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
F186
S48
S44
S42
S41
S38
S34
S32
S31
F187
S58
S54
S52
S51
10
F188
*EAXSL
CUT
EOV0 SRNMV THRD
TLNW TLCH
F189
RSMAX
SYN6OM SYN5OM SYN4OM SYN3OM SYN2OM SYN1OM
F190
F191
130

F192
F193
M228
M224
M222
M221
M218
M214
M212
M211
F194
M318
M314
M312
M311
M238
M234
M232
M231
F195
M338
M334
M332
M331
M328
M324
M322
M321
F196
UO107
UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101
UO100
F197
F198
F199
PMCCMC #7
G200 to G209 PMC window DI
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DI
G210
EFINA
G211
EC7A
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G212
EIF7A
EIF6A EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A EIF2A
EIF1A EIF0A
G213
EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G214
G215
EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G216
G217
G218
EFINB
G219
EC7B
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G220
EIF7B
EIF6B EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B EIF2B
EIF1B EIF0B
131

G221
EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
1
G222 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
G223
EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B
EID8B
2
G224 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B
G225
G226
G227
G228
G229
MRDYA ORCMA SFRA
SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G230
RCHA
RSLA
SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G231
G232
7
G233
MRDYB ORCMB SFRB ERVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234
PCHB
RSLB
SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
8
G235
G236
9
G237
SYN6M SYN5M SYN4M SYN3M SYN2M SYN1M
G238
PK6M
PK5M
PK4M PK3M
PK2M PK1M
10
G239
RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0
G240 to G249
Operators panel DI
Operators panel DI
132

CMCPMC #7
F250 to F269 PMC window DO
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DO
F270
EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F271
EMFA
F272
F273
EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECZKB EINPB
F274
EMFB
F275
F276
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
F277
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
F278
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F279
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
F280
SBSY
SZP
SALR
SGEN PCFNA PCHPA CFINA
CHPA
F281
ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA
SSTA ALMA
F282
PCFNA PCHPA CFINA CHPA
F283
F284
F285
ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB
SSTB ALMB
F286
PCFNB PCHPB CFINB CHPB
F287
F288
133

F289
RMTDO7 RMTDO6 RMTDO5 RMTDO4 RMTDO3 RMTDO2 RMTDO1 RMTDO0
F290 to F299
1
Operators panel DO
Operators panel DO
10
134

Address list (for 0TTC)
D Interface between CNC and PMC or machine tool
Diagnostic number and PMC address of 0TTC machine interface signal Diagnostic No.
000 to 040 048 to 086 100 to 147 148 to 199 200 to 249 250 to 299 100 to 147 148 to 187 200 to 209 250 to 279
PMC address
X000 to X040 Y048 to Y086 G100 to G147 F148 to F199 G200 to G249 F250 to F299 G1300 to G1347 F1348 to F1387 G1400 to G1409 F1450 to F1479
Direction of signal
Selection of tool post

Tool post 1 and tool post 2 Tool post 1 and tool post 2
Machine tool CNC
PMC Machine tool
PMC CNC
Tool post 1
CNC PMC
Tool post 1
PMC CNC
Tool post 1
CNC PMC
Tool post 1
PMC CNC
Tool post 2
CNC PMC
Tool post 2
PMC CNC
Tool post 2
CNC PMC
Tool post 2
Machine interface signal (MT CNC) (for tool post 1, 2) #7

X000 000
M1836 M1821 M185 M1835 M1820 M1834 M1819 M1833
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
X002
002
M1824 M188 M1838 M1823 M187 M1837 M1822 M186
X004
004
M1811 M1841 M1826 M1810 M1840 M1825 M189 M1839
X006
006
M1845 M1814 M1844 M1813 M1843 M1812 M1842 M1827
X008
008
SKIPM
MIT2M +MIT2M MIT1M +MIT1M ZAEM
XAEM
M1849 M1818 M1848 M1817 M1847 M1816 M1846 M1815
135

X010 010
M2011 M2041 M2026 M2010
X012
012
M2045 M2014 M2044 M2013 M2043 M2012 M2042 M2027
2
X014 014
M2049 M2018 M2048 M2017 M2047 M2016 M2046 M2015
X016
016
*DEC3
M16
*DECXM
*DECXS
3
M121 M111 M112
M138
M120
X017
017
*DEC4
M17
*DECZM
*DECZS
M139
M122
M123
M19
M110
X018
018
*ESPS
M18
*+LZM
M140
TRT2
M124 M125
5
X019 019
M2040
/
M2025
/
M209 M2039
X020
020
M113 M137 M15 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118
6
*ESPM
M141 M126 M127 M119 M133 M134 M135 M136
X021
021
X022
022
M142 M143 M144 M145 M146 M147 M148 M149
8
X040 040 SKIPS *+LZS MIT2S +MIT2S MIT1S +MIT1S ZAES XAES
M2811 M2817 M2810 M2816 M289 M2815 M288 M2814
NOTE
An alphabet at the tail of a signal name indicates as follows : jj . . jM ; Signal for tool post 1 jj . . jS ; Signal for tool post 2 When the signals are discriminated per page between tool post 1 and tool post 2, the alphabet at the tail is omitted. Machine interface signal (PMC MT) (for tool post 1, 2) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
/
M25 M26 M27 M28 M227 M226 M225
10
#2 #1 #0
Y048
048
Y049
049
M29
/
M241 M222
/
M223 M224
136

Y050 050
/
M210
/
M220 M219
/
M221
Y051
051
M233 M234 M235 M236 M237 M238 M239 M240
Y052
052
M211 M212 M213 M214 M215 M216 M217 M218
Y053
053
M242 M243 M244 M245 M246 M247 M248 M249
Y080
080
M198 M197 M196 M195 M194 M193 M192 M191
Y082
082
M1916 M1915 M1914 M1913 M1912 M1911 M1910 M199
Y084
084
M2036 M2021 M205 M2035 M2020 M2034 M2019 M2033
Y086
086
M2024 M208 M2038 M2023 M207 M2037 M2022 M206
Machine interface signal (PMC CNC) (for tool post 1) #7

G100 100 ED7
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
#4
ED4
#3
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
G101
101
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G102
102
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
G103
103
AFL
PRC
SPC
SPB
SPA
SPD
SRN
G104
104
RRW
*FLWU
G105
105
SVF4
SVF3
SVFZ
SVFX
G106
106
K7, 0
K6, F
K5, Z
K4, X
K3, R
K2, W
K1, U
K0, S
G107
107
KEOB KH, I, K KA, C
KP, Q
KT,.
KM,
K9, G
K8, N
G108
108
KSTART KINOUT KDELET KINSRT KALTER
G109
109
KALARM KDGNOS KPARAM KOFSET KPRGRM
KPOS
137

G110 110
KCAN
KXZ
G111
111
1
KRESET
G112
112
KSL
KS1
KS2
KS3
KS4
KS5
KSR
G113
113
2
KFWH KFUV KFZJ KFXY KFRC KFGB KFN) KFO( KFL+ *KFT KFS= KFM# KFF KFE KFK@ KFI,
G114
114
G115
115
3
BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
HX/ROV1 ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D
G116
116
+X
SBK
BDT
G117
117
HZ/ROV2
+Z
MLK
4
MP1/MINP
G118
118
DRN H3
GR2 3
GR1 +3
MP2 MP2
.Lower stage is selected when parameter No. 0031#5 is 1.

G119 119 H4 4 +4 *LDSP
6
G120 120 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST STLK MIX G121 121
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
7
G122 122 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1 G123 123 DRN
STSP *SCPF *SUCPF SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1
COFF COFF
.Lower stage is selected when parameter No. 0031#5 is 1.

G124 124 R081 R071 R061 R051 R041 R031 R021 R011
9
G125 125 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
G126
126
CDZ
SMZ
*OV16
OVC
HI4
HI3
HIZ
HIX
10
G127 127 DNCI
*ABSM
MIZ
IGNVRY
G128
128
IT4
IT3
ITZ
ITX
G129
129
G130
130
UI7
UI6
UI5
UI4
UI3
UI2
UI1
UI0
138

G131 131
UI15
UI14
UI13
UI12
UI11
UI10
UI9
UI8
G132
132
GOQSM GOQSM OFN5
OFN4
OFN3 OFN2
OFN1 OFN0
G133
133
WOSET
SLSPB SLSPA NOWT TRT2PC
G134
134
G135
135
.For custom macro

G136 136
.For custom macro

G137 137
.For custom macro

G138 138
*EDCZ *EDCX *+EDCZ *+EDCX
G139
139
G140
140
VINT
G141
141
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
BDT4
BDT3
BDT2
G142
142
G143
143
G144
144
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
G145
145
G146
146
G147
147
Machine interface signal (CNC PMC) (for tool post 1) #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7

F148 148 OP SA STL SPL ZP4 ZP3 ZPZ ZPX
F149
149
MA
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
F150
150
BF
DST
TF
SF
MF
F151
151
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
139

F152 152
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
F153
153
1
T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11 SPAL
F154
154
2
F155 155 F156 156
3
F157 157 MF3 MF2 M38 M34 M32 M31 F158 158 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
4
F159 159 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR9 AR8 F160 160
PSYN WATO
ESEND EREND
5
F161 161 ZP24 ZP23 ZP2Z ZP2X F162 162
UO7
UO6
UO5
UO4
UO3
UO2
UO1
UO0
6
F163 163 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8
F164
164
PRTSF RWD
SUCLP SCLP
7
F165 165 PX7 PX6 PX5 PX4 PX3 PX2 PX1 PX0
F166
166
8
F167 167 PZ7 PZ6 PZ5 PZ4 PZ3 PZ2 PZ1 PZ0
F168
168
9
F169 169
F170
170
10
F171 171 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F172
172
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
F173
173
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
F174
174
H4O
H3O
HZO
HXO
ZRNO MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
140

F175 175
MP2O
JV4O
JV2O
JV1O
F176
176
DRNO MLKO SBKO
BDTO
OV8O OV4O
OV2O OV1O
F177
177
4O
+4O
3O
+3O
ZO
+ZO
XO
+X O
F178
178
SPO
RTO
KEYO
F179
179
F180
180
TAL
BOFF COSP BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY
F181
181
F182
182
.For custom macro

F183 183
F184
184
F185
185
F186
186
F187
187
F188
188
F189
189
F190
190
F191
191
F192
192
F193
193
M228
M224
M222
M221
M218
M214
M212
M211
F194
194
M318
M314
M312
M311
M238
M234
M232
M231
F195
195
M338
M334
M332
M331
M328
M324
M322
M321
F196
196
141

F197 197
F198
198
1
UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124
F199
199
2
G200 200
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DI
G201
201
PMC window DI
G202
202
PMC window DI
[Kind of data]
G203 203 PMC window DI
[No. of words of data]

[Axis number]
6
[0 0]
G206
206
PMC window DI
7
G208
208
PMC window DI
8
G210
210
EFINA
9
G211 211 EC7A EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G212
212
EIF7A
EIF6A EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A EIF2A
EIF1A EIF0A
10
G213 213 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G214
214
G215
215
G216
216
142

G217 217
G218
218
EFINB
G219
219
EC7B
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G220
220
EIF7B
EIF6B EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B EIF2B
EIF1B EIF0B
G221
221
G222
222
G223
223
G224
224
G225
225
G226
226
G227
227
G228
228
G229
229
G230
230
G231
231
G232
232
G233
233
G234
234
G235
235
G236
236
G237
237
G238
238
G239
239
143

G240 240
Operators panel DI
G241
241
1
Operators panel DI Operators panel DI
G242
242
G243
243
2
G244
244
G245
245
3
G246
246
4
G247 247 Operators panel DI G248 248 Operators panel DI
5
G249 249 Operators panel DI
Machine interface signal (CNC PMC) (for tool post 1)

F250 250 PMC window DO
F251
251
PMC window DO
7
[Transferred data]
8
[Transferred data]
F254
254
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
10
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
144

F259 259
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
F269
269
PMC window DO
F270
270
EBSYA
EGENA EDENA EIALA
ECXZA EINPA
F271
271
EMFA
F272
272
F273
273
EBSYB
EGEND EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F274
274
EMFB
F275
275
F276
276
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
F277
277
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
145

F278 278
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
1
F279 279 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 F280 280
2
F281 281
F282
282
3
F283 283
F284
284
4
F285 285
F286
286
5
F287 287
F288
288
F289
289
F290
290
Operators panel DO
F291
291
Operators panel DO
F292
292
Operators panel DO
F293
293
Operators panel DO
F294
294
Operators panel DO
F295
295
Operators panel DO
F296
296
Operators panel DO
10
F297
297
Operators panel DO
F298
298
Operators panel DO
F299
299
Operators panel DO
146

G1300 100 ED7
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
#4
ED4
#3
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
G1301
101
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G1302
102
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
G1303
103
AFL
PRC
SPC
SPB
SPA
SPD
SPN
G1304
104
RRW
*FLWU
G1305
105
SVFZ
SVFX
G1306
106
K7, 0
K6, F
K5, Z
K4, X
K3, R
K2, W
K1, U
K0, S
G1307
107
KEOB KH, I, K KA, C
KP, Q
KT,.
KM,
K9, G
K8, N
G1308
108
KSTART KINOUT KDELET KINSRT KALTER
G1309
109
KALARM KDGNOS KPARAM KOFSET KPRGRM
KPOS
G1310
110
KCAN
KXZ
G1311
111
KRESET
G1312
112
KSL
KS1
KS2
KS3
KS4
KS5
KSR
G1313
113
KFWH
KFUV
KFZJ
KFXY
KFRC KFGB
KFN)
KFO(
G1314
114
KFL+
KFT*
KFS=
KFM#
KFF
KFE
KFK@
KFI,
G1315
115
BFIN
TFIN
SFIN
MFIN
G1316
116
HX/ROV1 ROV3D ROV2D ROV1D
+X
SBK
BDT
G1317
117
HZ/ROV2
+Z
MLK
MP1/MINP
G1318
118
DRN
GR2
GR1
MP2
G1319
119
G1320
120
ZRN
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
FIN
ST
STLK
MIX
G1321
121
ERS
RT
*SP
*ESP
*OV8
*OV4
*OV2
*OV1
147

G1322 122
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
KEY
MD4
MD2
MD1
G1323
123
1
R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
G1324
124
2
G1325 125 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I G1326 126 CDZ SMZ *OV16 OVC HIZ HIX
3
G1327 127 DNCI
*ABSM
MIZ
IGNVRY
G1328
128
ITZ
ITX
4
G1329 129 G1330 130
UI7
UI6
UI5
UI4
UI3
UI2
UI1
UI0
5
G1331 131 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8 G1332 132
GOQSM GOQSM OFN5
OFN4
OFN3 OFN2
OFN1 OFN0
6
G1333 133
WOSET NOWT
G1334
134
7
G1335 135
G1336
136
8
G1337 137
G1338
138
*EDCZ *EDCX
*+EDCZ *+EDCX
9
G1339 139
G1340
140
UINT
10
G1341 141 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G1342
142
G1343
143
G1344
144
148

G1345 145
G1346
146
G1347
147
Machine interface signal (CNC PMC) (for tool post 2) #7

F1348 148 OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
#2
#1
ZPZ
#0
ZPX
F1349
149
MA
TAP
ENB
DEN
RST
AL
F1350
150
BF
DST
TF
SF
MF
F1351
151
M28
M24
M22
M21
M18
M14
M12
M11
F1352
152
S28
S24
S22
S21
S18
S14
S12
S11
F1353
153
T28
T24
T22
T21
T18
T14
T12
T11
F1354
154
SPAL
F1355
155
F1356
156
F1357
157
MF3
MF2
M38
M34
M32
M31
F1358
158
AR7
AR6
AR5
AR4
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
F1359
159
AR15
AR14
AR13
AR12
AR11
AR10
AR9
AR8
F1360
160
WATO
ESEND EREND
F1361
161
ZP2Z
ZP2X
F1362
162
UO7
UO6
UO5
UO4
UO3
UO2
UO1
UO0
F1363
163
UO15
UO14
UO13
UO12
UO11
UO10
UO9
UO8
F1364
164
PRTSF RWD
F1365
165
PX7
PX6
PX5
PX4
PX3
PX2
PX1
PX0
F1366
166
149

F1367 167
PZ7
PZ6
PZ5
PZ4
PZ3
PZ2
PZ1
PZ0
F1368
168
F1369
169
2
F1370 170 F1371 171 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
3
F1372 172 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O F1373 173 R12O R11O R10O R09O
4
F1374 174 HZO HXO ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O F1375 175
MP2O
JV4O
JV2O
JV1O
5
F1376 176 DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO OV8O OV4O OV2O OV1O F1377 177
ZO
+Z O
XO
+X O
6
F1378 178 SPO RTO KEYO
F1379
179
7
F1380 180
BGEACT RPALM RPBSY RPGDPL
INHKY
F1381
181
8
F1382 182
F1383
183
9
F1384 184
F1385
185
10
F1386 186
F1387
187
F1388
188
F1389
189
150

F1390 190
F1391
191
F1392
192
F1393
193
M228
M224
M222
M221
M218
M214
M212
M211
F1394
194
M318
M314
M312
M311
M238
M234
M232
M231
F1395
195
M338
M334
M332
M331
M328
M324
M322
M321
F1396
196
F1397
197
F1398
198
F1399
199

G1400 200
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DI
G1401
201
PMC window DI
G1402
202
PMC window DI
[Kind of data]
[No. of words of data]

[Axis number]
[0 0]
G1407
207
PMC window DI
G1408
208
PMC window DI
G1409
209
PMC window DI
151

Machine interface signal (CNC PMC) (for tool post 2) #7
F1450 250
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMC window DO
F1451
251
PMC window DO
F1452
252
PMC window DO
2
[Transferred data]
F1453
253
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
5
[Transferred data]
F1457
257
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
7
[Transferred data]
8
[Transferred data]
F1461
261
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
F1463 263
10
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
152

F1466 266
PMC window DO
[Transferred data]
[Transferred data]
F1469
269
PMC window DO
F1470
270
F1471
271
F1472
272
F1473
273
F1474
274
F1475
275
F1476
276
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
F1477
277
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
F1478
278
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F1479
279
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
153
Address list (for CNC without PMC)

(1) M series (a) MT CNC (without PMC) #7
X000 000
M1836 M1821 M185 M1835 M1820 M1834 M1819 M1833
1
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#6
X002
002
M1824 M188 M1838 M1823 M187 M1837 M1822 M186
X004
004
4NG
M1811 M1841 M1826 M1810 M1840 M1825 M189 M1839
X006
006
M1845 M1814 M1844 M1813 M1843 M1812 M1842 M1827
X008
008
SKIP
*RILK
ZAE
YAE
XAE
M1849 M1818 M1848 M1817 M1847 M1816 M1846 M1815
5
X010 010
M2011 M2041 M2026 M2010
X012
012
M2045 M2014 M2044 M2013 M2043 M2012 M2042 M2027
X014
014
M2049 M2018 M2048 M2017 M2047 M2016 M2046 M2015
X016
016
HX/ROV1
*DECX
X
M120
+X
M121
SBK
BDT
M16
M138
M111 M112
X017
017
HY/ROV2
*DECY
+Y
M123
MLK
M19
*ILK
M110
M17
M139
M122
X018
018 HZ/DRN
M18
*DECZ
M140
Z
M124
+Z
M125
9
/ /
X019
019
H4
M2040
*DEC4
M2025
+4
M209 M2039
X020
020
10
ZRN
M113
*SSTP
M137
SOR
M15
SAR
M114
FIN
M115
ST
M116
MP2
MP1/MINP
M117 M118
X021
021
ERS
M141
RT
M126
*SP
M127
*ESP
M119
*OV8
M133
*OV4
M134
*OV2
*OV1
M135 M136
X022
022
PN8
M142
PN4
M143
PN2
M144
PN1
M145
KEY
M146
MD4
M147
MD2
MD1
M148 M149
154

(b) CNC MT (without PMC) #7
Y048 048 OP
M25
#6
SA
M26
#5
STL
M27
#4
SPL
M28
#3
/
#2
ZPZ/EF
M227
#1
ZPY
#0
ZPX
M226 M225
Y049
049
MA
M29
ENB
M241
DEN
M222
RST
AL
M223 M224
Y050
050
DST
M210
TF
M220
SF
M219
MF
M221
Y051
051
M28
M233
M24
M234
M22
M235
M21
M236
M18
M237
M14
M238
M12
M11
M239 M240
Y052
052
S28
M211
S24
M212
S22
M213
S21
M214
S18
M215
S14/GR30 S12/GR20 S11/GR10
M216
M217 M218
Y053
053
T28
M242
T24
M243
T22
M244
T21
M245
T18
M246
T14
M247
T12
T11
M248 M249
Y080
080
M198 M197 M196 M195 M194 M193 M192 M191
Y082
082
M1916 M1915 M1914 M1913 M1912 M1911 M1910 M199
Y084
084
ZP4
M2036 M2021 M205 M2035 M2020 M2034 M2019 M2033
Y086
086
M2024 M208 M2038 M2023 M207 M2037 M2022 M206
(2) T series (a) MT CNC (without PMC) #7

X000 000
M1836 M1821 M185 M1835 M1820 M1834 M1819 M1833
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
X002
002
M1824 M188 M1838 M1823 M187 M1837 M1822 M186
X004
004
M1811 M1841 M1826 M1810 M1840 M1825 M189 M1839
X006
006
M1845 M1814 M1844 M1813 M1843 M1812 M1842 M1827
155

X008 008
SKIP SKIP
ZAE SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 ZAE
XAE XAE
M1849 M1818 M1848 M1817 M1847 M1816 M1846 M1815
.Lower stage for 0G

X010 010
M2011 M2041 M2026 M2010
X012
012
M2045 M2014 M2044 M2013 M2043 M2012 M2042 M2027
X014
014
M2049 M2018 M2048 M2017 M2047 M2016 M2046 M2015
4
X016 016
HX/ROV1
*DECX
M138
X
M120
+X
M121
SBK
BDT
M16
M111 M112
X017
017
HY/ROV2
*DECY
M139
Z
M122
+Z
M123
MLK
M19
MP1/MINP
M17
M110
X018
018
DRN
M18
*+LZ
M140
GR2
M124
GR1
M125
6
/ /
X019
019
*DEC3
M2040
*DEC4
M2025
/
M209 M2039
7
X020 020 ZRN
M113
*SSTP
M137
SOR
M15
SAR
M114
FIN
M115
ST
M116
STLK
MIX
M117 M118
X021
021
ERS
M141
RT
M126
*SP
M127
*ESP
M119
*OV8
M133
*OV4
M134
*OV2
*OV1
M135 M136
X022
022
PN8
M142
PN4
M143
PN2
M144
PN1
M145
KEY
M146
MD4
M147
MD2
MD1
M148 M149
(b) CNC MT (without PMC) #7

Y048 048 OP
M25
#6
SA
M26
#5
STL
M27
#4
SPL
M28
#3
/
#2
#1
ZPT
#0
ZPX
10
M227
M226 M225
Y049
049
MA
M29
ENB
M241
DEN
M222
RST
AL
M223 M224
Y050
050
DST
M210
TF
M220
SF
M219
MF
M221
156

Y051 051
M28
M233
M24
M234
M22
M235
M21
M236
M18
M237
M14
M238
M12
M11
M239 M240
Y052
052
S28
M211
S24
M212
S22
M213
S21
M214
S18
M215
S14
M216
S12
S11
M217 M218
Y053
053
T28
M242
T24
M243
T22
M244
T21
M245
T18
M246
T14
M247
T12
T11
M248 M249
Y080
080
M198 M197 M196 M195 M194 M193 M192 M191
Y082
082
M1916 M1915 M1914 M1913 M1912 M1911 M1910 M199
Y084
084
M2036 M2021 M205 M2035 M2020 M2034 M2019 M2033
Y086
086
M2024 M208 M2038 M2023 M207 M2037 M2022 M206
157
LEDs on the PC board

LED Number
L1 L2 L3
1
Color
Green Red Red
Meaning and action to be taken

Blinks during automatic operation. This is not an alarm. Lights on any alarm. Take a necessary action according to the alarm number displayed on the CRT screen. No memory card is installed. (1) A watchdog timer alarm occurred. The master PC board or memory card is defective. . Equiva-
L4
Red
lent to alarm 920 (2) A servo alarm occurred. (3) An axis card is not installed or is defective. (1) A subCPU watchdog timer alarm occurred. Replace the subCPU PC board. (2) A servo alarm occurred on the fifth or sixth axis. A system alarm occurred. (1) The analog interface card is defective. (2) The DNC1 card is defective. (3) The seventh or eighthaxis card is defective.
L5
Red
L6
Red
5
(1) FS0C control section A master (A20B10020360) FS0Mate master (A20B10030760) FS0C control section A (A20B20000170)
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
f f f f f f
f L1 f L4
f L2 f L5
f L3 f L6
8
(2) FS0C control section B master (A20B10030750) (A20B20000180)
9
f f f f f f
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
10
158
8. HARDWARE
8.1 Configuration of CNC Machine Tool
Machine tool magnetics cabinet
Heat exchanger
Operators panel interface
Relay connector
Control unit
I/O unit
Magnetics circuit
Servo amplifier
Multitap transformer for control unit
Spindle amplifier
(Note 3)
Host computer
Power supply
Distribution board
159
1
CRT/MDI unit
2
Machine operators panel Manual pulse generator
3
(Note 1) I/O device
Machine tool
5
Sensor, Actuator
6
(Note 2) Servo motor
Spindle motor
9
NOTE 1 Refer to FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A CONNECTION/MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-61813E) NOTE 2 Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65142E) NOTE 3 Refer to FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series SERIAL INTERFACE DESCRIPTIONS (B-65152E)
10
160
8. HARDWARE
8.2 Configulation of Control Unit
(1) Connector name of master PCB

MEM PAS1 I/O PMC GR
AXE
JA1JA2 CE0 CAP
Control unit A
MEM L/A AXA AXS SUB RE SP PAS1 I/O PMC GR
AXE
PAS2
CE0
CAP
Control unit B
161
(2) Configulation of PCB

Connector name
Master PCB
PCB name
Control unit A 0C 0Mate C
Specification
A20B-2000-0170 A20B-1003-0760 A20B-2000-0480 A20B-2001-0060 A20B-2001-0110 A20B-2000-0180 A20B-2000-0490 A16B-1211-0850 A16B-1212-0100 A16B-1212-0110 A16B-1211-0890 A16B-1211-0920 A16B-2200-0350
Control unit B
0C
00C CAP Power unit A AI B2 C GR Graphic PCB Manual pulse generator interface PMC PMCM PCB For two or three manual pulse generators Electrical i t f interface Optical i t f interface I/O Link M t only l Master I/O Link M t &Sl Master&Slave AXE Axis control PCB (2 to 3/4 axes) 0Mate C For A/B phase hase pulse coder 0C For A/B phase hase pulse coder 0Mate C/0C Response for serial pulse coder I/O I/O PCB I/OC5 (40/40) Sink output type I/OC6 (80/56) Sink output type I/OC7 (104/72) Sink output type I/OE1 (40/40) Source output type I/OE2 (80/56) Source output type I/OE3 (104/72) Source output type MEM Memory PCB Respose for serial spindle ROM RAM ROM RAM ROM RAM ROM RAM 2 axes 3/4 axes 2 axes 3/4 axes 2 axes 3/4 axes
A16B-1210-0801
A16B-1211-0901 A16B-1211-0907 A16B-1211-0903 A16B-1211-0909 A16B-2200-0341 A16B-2200-0346 A16B-2200-0340 A16B-2200-0345 A16B-2200-0221 A16B-2200-0220 A16B-2200-0361 A16B-2200-0360 A16B-2200-0391 A16B-2200-0390 A16B-1212-0222 A16B-1212-0221 A16B-1212-0220 A16B-1211-0972 A16B-1211-0971 A16B-1211-0970 A16B-1212-0215 A16B-1212-0216 A16B-2201-0101 A16B-1212-0210 A16B-2201-0103
10
For analog spindle
162
8. HARDWARE
Connector name
PAS1 (PAS2) Cassette for macro executer Main side PAS1 (Sub side PAS2) JA1 JA2 DNC1 card (for control unit A) DNC2 card Remote buffer card (for control unit A) SP DNC1 card (for control unit B) DNC2 card Remote buffer card (for control unit B) SUB Sub PCU PCB
PCB name
64KB 128KB 256KB 512KB 1MB For 0Mate C For 0C For 0C
Specification
A02B-0091-C111 A02B-0091-C113 A02B-0091-C115 A02B-0098-C117 A02B-0098-C118 A16B-2200-0771 A16B-2200-0776 A16B-2200-0775
For 0C
A16B-2200-0776
For 0C
A16B-2200-0775
Standard (SUB CPU 16 bit) Highspeed (SUB CPU 32 bit) For A/B phase pulse coder Response for serial pulse coder For A/B phase pulse coder 5/6 axes 5/6 axes
A16B-2200-0320 A16B-2201-0120 A16B-2200-0371 A16B-2200-0800
AXS
Axis control PCB (5/6 axes)
AXA
Axis control PCB (7/8 axes)
7 axes
A16B-2200-0381
7/8 axes Response for serial pulse coder 7 axes
A16B-2200-0380 A16B-2200-0791
7/8 axes LA Analog interface PCB Laser interface PCB
A16B-2200-0790 A16B-1211-0961 A16B-1212-0270
163
(3) Connector name
1
124 123
CPA11
CPB1 M228 M225 M209 M206 M227
CPB2 M224 M207 M204 M73
ANALOG I/F 7/8 AXES FOR SERIAL 5/6 AXES FOR SERIAL
226
CPA10
M29 M28
M208 M205 M77
P6 A7 M77 M73 MACRO CASETTE M5 M74 A7 19 M20 M1 M188 M185 M18 M3 CCX5 M12 M26 M27
SUB CPU DNC1, DNC2 REMOTE BUFFER
4
MEMORY I/O
89 86 4 X4
CPA9
M198 M195
M197 M194
M187 M184
3/4 AXES FOR SERIAL PMCM GRAPHIC POWER SUPPLY UNIT
10
164
8. HARDWARE
Overall machinetomachine connection diagram (phase A/B pulse coder capability axis card with no separate detector)
Ordermade macro cassette PAS I/O C5C7 PCB I/O M1 C5 M2 M18 C6 M19 Master PCB C7 M20 H20 F BN3 F CP51 M78 M79 Graphic/MPG PCB M21 GR CCX4 M80 I/O B2 PCB M61 M60 M62 Operators panel M1A M1B M2A M2B
PMCM PCB PMC M24
Memory card MEM CCX5 M3
CN1 CRT/MDI unit KM1 CN2
Relay connector M5
M74
M12
M26 M27 CPA7 Battery
165
Magnetic panel
FANUC PPR FANUC CASSETTE Portable tape reader
8
MPG 1st MPG 2nd M3 MPG 3rd M3
Tape reader
M3
Position corder Spindle control unit
10
166
8. HARDWARE
Axis control PCB AXE M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 CPA9 Battery (6V) CN1 Servo amp T1 4th axis CN2 CN1 Servo amp T1 3rd axis CN2 CN1 Servo amp T1 2nd axis CN2 CN1 Servo amp T1 1st axis CN2
Power unit CP14 CP15 CP3 CP2 CP2 CAP CP1
Battery (6V) is necessary for the absolute pulse coder ON OFF
167
CH CH AC motor 1st axis
CH CH AC motor 2nd axis
CH CH AC motor 3rd axis
CH CH AC motor 4th axis
Emergency stop
Electro magnetic contactor 100VAC Singlephas AC input 3 phase
Servo trans 1 Servo trans 2
Fuse
200VAC Singlephase
10
168
8. HARDWARE
Overall machinetomachine connection diagram (dedicated phase A/B pulse coder axis card with a separate detector)
PMCM PCB PMC M24
Relay connector M5
M74
M12
169
Magnetic panel
8
Tape reader
M3
10
170
8. HARDWARE
171
Speedrate type pulse coder
Emergency stop
Fuse
200VAC Singlephase
10
172
8. HARDWARE
Overall machinetomachine connection diagram (serial pulse coder capability axis card with no separate detector)
PMCM PCB PMC M24
Relay connector M5
M74
M12
173
Magnetic panel
8
Tape reader
M3
10
174
8. HARDWARE
175
Emergency stop
Fuse
200VAC Singlephase
10
176
8. HARDWARE
Overall machinetomachine connection diagram (serial pulse coder capability axis card with a separate detector)
PMCM PCB PMC M24
Relay connector M5
M74
M12
177
Magnetic panel
8
Tape reader
M3
10
178
8. HARDWARE
179
Emergency stop
Fuse
200VAC Singlephase
10
180
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
FUNCTION PARAMETERS (FOR MACHINING CENTER)

(1) Setting parameters (2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface and remote buffer (3) Parameters related to controlled axes and the increment system (4) Parameters related to coordinate systems (5) Parameters related to the stroke limit (6) Parameters related to the feedrate (7) Parameters related to acceleration/deceleration control (8) Parameters related to servo motors (9) Parameters related to DI/DO (10) Parameters related to the CRT/MDI, display, and editing (11) Parameters related to programming (12) Parameters related to pitch error compensation (13) Parameters related to spindle control (14) Parameters related to tool compensation (15) Parameters related to canned cycles (16) Parameters related to rigid tapping (17) Parameters related to scaling and coordinate system rotation (18) Parameters related to unidirectional positioning (19) Parameters related to control in the normal direction (20) Parameters related to index table indexing (21) Parameters related to custom macro (22) Parameters related to automatic tool length measurement (23) Parameters related to graphic display (24) Parameters related to the display of operation time and number of parts (25) Parameters related to tool life management (26) Parameters related to the position switch function (27) Parameters related to manual handle feed/manual handle interrupt (28) Parameters related to the software operators panel (29) Parameters related to program resumption (30) Parameters related to the highspeed cycle machining/high speed remote buffer (31) Parameters related to PMC axis control (32) Parameters related to surface grinding machines (slanted axis control) (33) Parameters related to simple synchronous control (34) Parameters related to the PMC (35) Parameters related to the function for setting the zero point using the butt method (36) Parameters related to the DNC (37) Parameters related to the MNET NOTE 1 A bit parameter has two meanings, each described on the left and right of |. The meaning on the left applies when the bit is set to 0 and the meaning on the right applies when it is set to 1. (Example) The current value is 0/1. NOTE 2 For details, refer to Description of Parameters.
181
(1) Setting parameters (1/1) No.

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Symbol
REVX, Y, 4 TVON ISO INCH I/O ABS SEQ PWE TAPEF PRGNO SEQNO
Description
The mirror image of each axis is disabled/enabled. When a program is registered, a TV check is not executed/is executed. The code system used to output a program is EIA/ISO. The least input increment (input unit) of a program is one millimeter/one inch. Input/output unit on the reader/punch interface In the MDI mode, commands are specified with incremental values/absolute values. Sequence numbers are not automatically inserted/are automatically inserted. Parameters cannot be written/can be written. The tape format is not converted/is converted. Number of the program to be stopped when the specified sequence number is found Number of the sequence to be stopped when it is found
(2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface and remote buffer (1/2) No.
0002#0 0012#0 0050#0 0051#0 0002#2 0012#0 0002#3 0012#3 0050#3 0051#3 0002#7 0012#7 0050#7 0051#7 0015#5 0018#6 0038#1, #2 0038#4, #5 0038#6, #7 0051#1 0051#2 0051#4
Symbol
STP2 STP2 STP2 STP2 ASR33 ASR33 RSASCI RSASCI RSASCI RSASCI NFED NFED NFED NFED PRWD TVC
:::, ::: :::, ::: :::, :::
Description
(I/O=0) The stop bit is 1/2. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) (I/O=0) FANUC PPR etc./20mA current interface (I/O=1) (I/O=0) The input/output code is ISO or EIA/ ASCII. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) (I/O=0) Beforehand and afterwards, a feed character is output/is not output. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) The rewind signal is not output/is output to the portable tape reader. In the comment section of a program, a TV check is executed/is not executed. (I/O=3) Setting the input/output unit (I/O=2) (I/O=0, 1) (I/O=3) A parity bit is not provided/is provided. With protocol B, the output of the SYN and NAK codes is not controlled/is controlled. On the remote buffer interface, the CD (signal quality detection) status is monitored/is not monitored.
10
PARTY SYNAK NCKCD
182
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
(2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface and remote buffer (2/2) No.
0051#5 0055#0 0055#1 0055#2 0055#3 0055#7
Symbol
ECKL ASCII ETX PROTCA RS42 RMSTS
Description
The baud rate clock of the remote buffer is an internal clock/external clock. Communication of all data except NC data is executed in ISO code/ASCII code. The end code is CR/ETX. Communication protocol B/A The remote buffer interface is RS232C/ RS422. If the remote buffer interface is used with protocol A, the status of the remote buffer in the SAT message is always returned without specification (= 0)/hosts request for switching the SET message is unconditionally returned. If data is output in ISO code, the EOB code is LF, CR, or CR/LF. If a null character is detected while EIA codes are read, an alarm does not occur/occurs. On reader/punch interface 2, rewinding is not executed/is executed. On the RS232C interface, the DC code is used/is not used. The ER (RS 232C) or TR (RS422) signal is checked/is not checked. The BCC value is checked/is not checked. A4digit hexadecimal error code is not appended to a negative acknowledgement/is appended to a negative acknowledgement. A feed character in a significant information section is output as a space character/null character. (I/O=2) Baud rate (I/O=3) (I/O=0) (I/O=1)
0070#7 0075#7 0076#5 0391#6 0396#0 0396#2 0396#3
ICR IONUL PRWD RS23BN NCKER BCC ERCODE
0399#6 0250 0251 0552 0553
FEDNUL
(3) Parameters related to controlled axes and the increment system (1/2) No.
0001#0 7001#0 0003#0 to #3
Symbol
SCW SCWS ZM:
Description
The least command increment (output unit) for a linear axis is one millimeter/inch. (X to 4) The direction of a reference position return and initial direction are positive/ negative. (7, 8) (5, 6) (4) Axis name (4) (7, 8) (5, 6) (4) (7, 8) (5, 6) Rotation axis/linear axis Rotation axis/linear axis Linear axis/rotation axis
0066#4, #5 7003#0, #1 0008#2 to #4 0280 0285, 0286 7130, 7131 0011#2 0062#4, #5 7032#0, #1 0024#1 0049#4 ADW: ADLN ADLIN: ROT: LII10 S3JOG
The input/output unit is ISB/ISA. The number of axes that can be simultaneously controlled in manual operation is one/up to three.
183
(3) Parameters related to controlled axes and the increment system (2/2) No.
0057#3 0062#7 0066#1
Symbol
MIC C8NG NBD78
Description
If a decimal point is omitted, the least input increment is not multiplied/is multiplied by ten. The eighth axis is enabled/disabled. If there are more servo axes than controlled axes, the singleaxis extension function for the controlled axis is disabled/enabled. If a reference position return is not made and a movement command other than G28 is specified, an alarm does not occur/occurs. The function for setting the reference position without dogs is disabled/enabled. The function for setting the reference position without dogs is enabled/disabled. The rollover function is disabled/enabled. The direction of rotation specified in ABS mode is determined so that the distance of rotation is minimized/determined according to the sign of the specified value. Relative coordinates which are not multiples of the travel distance per rotation are not rounded/ are rounded. If the remaining travel distance or active miscellaneous function is found at a manual return to the reference position, an alarm occurs/does not occur. Number of a servo axis Attribute of the fourth axis If inch output is specified for the fifth or sixth axis, the unit of parameters related to feedrate is 0.1 deg/min/1 deg/min.
0074#0 to #3
CRF:
0076#1 0391#0 to #5 0398#1 0398#2
JZRN JZRN: ROAX RODRC
0398#3
ROCNT
0399#7
OUTZRN
0269 to 0274 0279 7032#7
ROT10S
7
(4) Parameters related to coordinate systems (1/2) No.
0010#7 7010#7 0024#6 0028#5
Symbol
APRS APRSS CLCL EX10D
Description
At a manual reference position return, automatic coordinate system setting is not executed/is executed. At a manual reference position return, the local coordinate system is not canceled/is canceled. When an external workpiece coordinate system shift is executed, the offset value is the input value/tentimes the input value. (X to 4) Coordinates of the reference position for automatic coordinate system setting (X to 4) (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Distance from the first reference position to the second reference position (7, 8) Offset from the external workpiece reference point on each axis Offset from the first workpiece reference point on each axis (G54)
0708 to 0711
10
0815 to 0818 0825, 0826 7708, 7709 0735 to 0738 0866, 0867 0751 to 0754 0755 to 0758
184
9. PARAMETERS
0759 to 0762 0763 to 0766 0767 to 0770 0771 to 0774 0775 to 0778 0780 to 0783 0868 to 0869 0784 to 0787 0870, 0871 0860 7717
For M series
Symbol

Description
Offset from the second workpiece reference point on each axis (G55) Offset from the third workpiece reference point on each axis (G56) Offset from the fourth workpiece reference point on each axis (G57) Offset from the fifth workpiece reference point on each axis (G58) Offset from the sixth workpiece reference point on each axis (G59) (X to 4) Distance from the first reference position to the third reference position (7, 8) (X to 4) Distance from the first reference position to the fourth reference position (7, 8) Travel distance per revolution about the rotation axis Machine coordinate system when the fifth or sixth axis is a rotation axis
(5) Parameters related to the stroke limit (1/1) No.

0008#6 0015#4 0024#4 0057#5 0065#3 0076#7 0700 to 0703 0821, 0822 7700, 7701 0704 to 0707 0823, 0824 7704, 7705 0743 to 0746 0747 to 0750 0804 to 0806 0807 to 0809
Symbol
OTZN LM2 INOUT HOT3 PSOT OTRF0M
Description
A Zaxis stored stroke check is executed/is not executed. The signal for switching the second stored stroke limit is disabled/enabled. The inhibited area of the third stored stroke limit is the inside/outside. The hardware OT signals +LMX to LMZ (G129, #0 to #5) are disabled/enabled. Before a reference position return is made, the stored stroke limit is checked/is not checked. An alarm occurs after the stroke limit is exceeded/before the stroke limit is exceeded. (X to 4) First stored stroke limit in the positive direction on each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) First stored stroke limit in the negative direction on each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Second stored stroke limit in the positive direction on each axis Second stored stroke limit in the negative direction on each axis Third stored stroke limit in the positive direction on each axis Third stored stroke limit in the negative direction on each axis
185
(6) Parameters related to the feedrate (1/2) No.

0001#6 7001#6 0008#5 0010#0 0011#3 0015#3 0049#6 0049#7
Symbol
RDRN RDRNS ROVE ISOT ADNW SKPF NPRV FML10
Description
For the rapid traverse command, a dry run is disabled/enabled. The rapid traverse override signal ROV2 (G117, #7) is enabled/disabled. When a reference position is not established, manual rapid traverse is disabled/enabled. Feedrate specification A/B With G31, a dry run, override, or automatic acceleration/deceleration is disabled/enabled. When a position coder is not used, the command of feed per rotation is disabled/enabled. The unit of parameters in which the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are specified is not multiplied/is multiplied by ten. Of the commands specifying feed in the positive direction on each axis, external deceleration is valid for rapid traverse only/for both rapid traverse and cutting feed. Of the commands specifying feed in the negative direction on each axis, external deceleration is valid for rapid traverse only/for both rapid traverse and cutting feed. The function for changing the speed of outer arc machining is disable/enabled. In helical interpolation, the feedrate is not clamped/is clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate. If the cutting feedrate override is 0% in rapid traverse, a stop does not occur/occurs. The signal of feedrate override in 1% steps is disable/enabled. Minimum deceleration ratio for the speed of inner arc machining by automatic corner override (MDR) Amount of automatic override for the inside of a corner Inside angle for determining whether to use automatic override for the inside of a corner Feedrate change corresponding to a graduation on the manual pulse generator when the F command is specified with one digit Feedrate after acceleration/deceleration for automatic corner deceleration Difference between feedrates of two blocks, for each axis, for automatic corner deceleration Feedrate after acceleration/deceleration for automatic corner deceleration (for lookahead control) Maximum feedrate with standard arc radius Minimum feedrate with standard arc radius (X to 4) Rapid traverse feedrate for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Maximum cutting feedrate
0059#0 to #2
EDP:
0059#3 to #5
EDM:
0393#1 0393#4
COVOUT HLCLMP
0393#5 0397#2 0213
STOV0 OVR255
0214 0215 0216
0482 0483 0487
10
0495 0496 0518 to 0521 0643, 0644 7518, 7519 0527
186
9. PARAMETERS
0530 7530 0533 7533 0534 7534 0548 0549 0559 to 0562 0565, 0566 0567 0568 0569 0538, 0584 0580 0581 0605 to 0608 0636 0684 0788 to 0796 0878
For M series
Symbol
Description
(X to 4) FL speed in exponential acceleration/ deceleration of cutting feed (5, 6) (X to 4) F0 speed of rapid traverse override (5, 6) (X to 4) FL speed at a reference position return (5, 6) FL speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration of manual feed Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at power on Jog rapid traverse rate for each axis Jog feedrate when the rotary switch is set to position 10 Maximum cutting feedrate with feedrate specification B F0 speed of rapid traverse override on an additional axis with feedrate specification B FL speed at a reference position return on an additional axis with feedrate specification B Maximum feedrate by the F command specified with one digit Start distance (Le) for inner corner automatic override End distance (Ls) for inner corner automatic override FL speed of exponential acceleration/deceleration for manual feed on each axis External deceleration speed Feedrate with which the error detect function assumes that deceleration is completed Feedrate corresponding to the F command specified with one digit FL speed for exponential acceleration/deceleration of cutting feed (for lookahead control)
187
(7) Parameters related to acceleration/deceleration control (1/2) No.

0020#5 0045#3
Symbol
NCIPS LSUP
Description
A position check is executed/is not executed. For cutting feed, exponential acceleration/deceleration is executed/linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is executed. The inposition width for cutting feed is specified with the same parameters as those used for rapid traverse (No. 0500 to 0503)/with different parameters (No. 0609 to 0612) Rapid traverse block overlap is disabled/enabled. The error detect function is disable/enabled. Feedrate ratio at which the next block is started for block overlap Automatic corner deceleration is disabled/enabled. For automatic corner deceleration, control based on the feedrate difference is disabled /enabled. Linear acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is type A/type B. Feed forward control is applied only to cutting feed/applied to both cutting feed and rapid traverse. For feedtypebased inposition check (CCINP: bit 4 of parameter 0045), the inposition width for cutting feed is specified using parameters other than those for rapid traverse, only when the next block also specifies cutting feed/regardless of the type of feed specified in the next block. Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation Feedrate after acceleration/deceleration for automatic corner deceleration Difference between feedrates of two blocks, for each axis, for automatic corner deceleration Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation (for lookahead conrtol) Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation (for lookahead conrtol) (X to 4) Time constant of linear acceleration/ deceleration in rapid traverse on each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or manual feed (5, 6) (X to 4) Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in manual feed on each axis Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed
0045#4
CCINP
0048#4 0076#0 0379 0393#0 0395#3 0395#6 0399#2
SMZCT ERDT FERDT CHEAFD FWBTYP RPDFF
0399#4
CINPS
0480 0481 0482 0483 0485
0486
0522 to 0525
0645, 0646 7522, 7523 0529 7529 0601 to 0604
10
0635
188
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
(7) Parameters related to acceleration/deceleration control (2/2) No.

0651 to 0656
Symbol
Description
(X to 8) Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed on a PMC axis (5, 6) Standard arc radius for feedrate clamp according to arc radius Critical angle between two blocks for automatic corner deceleration (for advanced preview control) Critical angle between two blocks for automatic corner deceleration Time constant for exponential acceleration/ deceleration of cutting feed (for advanced preview control) Time constant for linear acceleration /deceleration after interpolation of cutting feed (for advanced preview control) (X to 4th) Time constant T2 for rapid traverse bellshaped acceleration/deceleration for each axis
7651, 7652 0863 0864
0865 0877
0879
0952 to 0955
(8) Parameters related to servo motors (1/2) No.

0004 to 0007 0067, 0068 0570 to 0575 7004, 7005 7570, 7571 0004 to 0007 0067, 0068 7004, 7005 0010#2 7010#2 0021#0 to #5 7021#0, #1 0021#6
Symbol
GRD: GRD: DMR: DMR: DMR: DMR: OFFVY OFFVYS APC: APC: NOFLUP
Description
(X to 4) Capacity of the reference counter of each axis (7, 8) (X to 8) (5, 6) (5, 6) (X to 4) Detection multiplication of each axis (DMR) (7, 8) (5, 6) If VRDY is set to 1 before PRDY is set to 1, an alarm occurs/does not occur. (X to 8) For each axis, an absoluteposition detector is not used/is used. (5, 6) At poweron before the reference position is established by the absoluteposition detector, a followup is executed/is not executed. (X to 8) The reference position has not yet been established/has already been established by the absoluteposition detector. (5, 6) (X to 8) An optional CMR is not used/is used. (5, 6) (X to 8) As a position detector, a separate pulse coder is not used/is used. (5, 6) (X to 8) A highresolution pulse coder is not used/is used. (5, 6) Cutting feed and rapid traverse separate backlash is disabled/enabled.
0022#0 to #5
ABS:
7022#0, #1 0035#7 7035#7 0037#0 to #5 7037#0, #1 0037#7 7037#7 0076#4
ABS: ACMR ACMRS SPTP: SPTP: PLCO1 PLCO1S ADBLS
189
(8) Parameters related to servo motors (2/2) No.

0390#0 to #5
Symbol
NREQ:
Description
If an absolute pulse coder is used for each axis and the zero point is not established before poweron, an alarm requesting a return to the reference position does not occur/occurs. The reference position shift function is disabled/ enabled. If a servo alarm is detected by the CNC, a follow up is executed/is not executed. (X to 4) Command multiplication of each axis (CMR) (7, 8) (5, 6) Time interval for leveling the current value display on the servo adjustment screen (X to 8 3RD WORD) Count at the zero point of the APC (X to 4 LOWER 2 WORD) (7, 8 LOWER 2 WORD) (5, 6 3RD WORD) (5, 6 LOWER 2 WORD) (X to 4) Effective area on each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Limit on position error for each axis during traveling (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Grid shift amount for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Loop gain of position control for each axis (7, 8) (X to 4) Loop gain of position control common to all axes (5, 6) (X to 4) Backlash compensation for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Limit on position error for each axis during a stop (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4th) Inposition width for cutting feed for each axis Distance between the position at which the deceleration dog is turned off and the first grid point
0399#3 0399#5 0100 to 0103 0275, 0276 7100, 7101 0265 0452 to 0457 0739 to 0742 0827, 0828 7580, 7581 7739, 7740 0500 to 0503 0637, 0638 7500, 7501 0504, 7507 0639, 0640 7504, 7505 0508 to 0511 0641, 0642 7508, 7509 0512 to 0515 0632, 0633 0517 7517 0535 to 0538 0647, 0648 7535, 7536 0593 to 0596 0649, 0650 7593, 7594 0609 to 0612 0956
SFDEC FUNO
10
190
9. PARAMETERS
(9) Parameters related to DI/DO (1/1) No.
0001#2
For M series
Symbol
DCS
Description
The START key on the MDI panel is connected through the machine/is not connected through the machine. (X to 4) At a reference position return, deceleration occurs when the deceleration signal is set to 0/1. (5, 6) (X to 4) Acceleration occurs when the override signal or rapid traverse override signal is set to 0/1. (5, 6) Interlock occurs on all axes or Zaxis only/on an individual axis. (X to 4) Time period in which the signal (FIN, bit 3 of G120) indicating that the miscellaneous function, spindlespeed function, or tool function has been completed is accepted (5, 6) (X to 4) Period up to the time when the signal indicating that the code of the miscellaneous function, spindlespeed function, or tool function is read is sent (5, 6) Interlock occurs on all axes/Zaxis only. The highspeed interlock signal *RILK (X008, #5) is disabled/enabled. The signal to ignore the fourth axis 4NG (X004, #7) is disabled/enabled. For the B code, six digits/three digits are output. The rewind signal RWD (F164, #6) is output only when the tape reader is rewinding/is output while a program in memory is rewound. For processing the M, S, T, and B codes, the standard interface is used/the highspeed interface is used. The signal for separate interlock in the direction of each axis is disabled/enabled. The highspeed interlock signal is always enabled/is disabled when the signal for separate interlock in the direction of each axis is set to 1. When output is started in background editing, the signal for starting manual data input DST (F150, #5) is output/is not output. Extension time for the reset signal
0001#5
DECI
7001#5 0003#4
DECIS OVRI
7003#4 0008#7 0009#0 to #3
OVRIS EILK TFIN
7009#0 to #3 0009#4 to #7
TFIN TMF
7009#4 to #7 0012#1 0015#2 0019#1 0020#4 0045#2
TMF ZILK RIKL C4NG BCD3 RWDOUT
0045#7
HSIF
0049#0 0049#1
DILK RDIK
0070#4
DSTBGE
0252
191
(10) Parameters related to the CRT/MDI, display, and editing (1/3) No.
0001#1 0001#4 0002#1 7002#1 0010#1 0011#7 0013#4 0015#0 0015#1 0015#6
Symbol
PROD IOF PPD PPDS EBCL MCINP INHMN CBLNK NWCH REP
Description
In the relative coordinate display, tool length compensation is included/is not included. An offset value is input from the MID panel in the ABS mode/INC mode. Coordinate system setting does not cause relative coordinates to be preset/causes relative coordinates to be preset. When a program in memory is displayed, the EOB code is displayed as ;/:. By MINP (G120, #0), a program is not registered/ is registered in memory. Menus are displayed/are not displayed. The cursor blinks/does not blink. The amount of tool wear compensation is displayed with a character W/without a character W. If a program registered from the reader/punch interface has the same number as another program registered in memory, an alarm occurs/the program is replaced. In the absolute coordinate display, tool length compensation is included/is not included. With the standard keyboard, editing A is executed/editing B is executed. M02, M30, or M99 terminates program registration/does not terminate program registration. On the diagnostic screen, the data of a timer counter is displayed in binary/decimal. Setting of the language to be used on the display On the program check screen, relative coordinates are displayed/absolute coordinates are displayed. The actual speed is not displayed/is displayed. In MDI operation B, the modal status is not displayed/is displayed. On the absolute or relative position display screen, the fifth or sixth axis is not displayed/is displayed. The current position on each axis is displayed/is not displayed. With the CRT or MDI, a standard keypad is used/ full keypad is used. On the program directory screen, program names are not displayed/are displayed. On the program directory screen, programs are arranged in the order in which they are registered/in the ascending order of program numbers. Under I/O unit external control, reading depends on the REP bit (bit 6 of parameter 0015)/a program is registered after all programs are deleted. Reading on the reader/punch interface causes all programs to be registered/only the first program to be registered.
0018#5 0018#7 0019#6 0019#7 0023#0 to #6 0028#0
PROAD EDITB NEOP DBCD

::::
PRCPOS
0028#2 0028#3 0029#6
DACTF MMDL DSPSUB
0035#0 to #3 0038#3 0040#0 0040#4
NDSP: FLKY NAMPR SORT
10
0045#0
RDL
0045#1
RAL
192
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
0048#7
Symbol
SFFDSP
Description
The softkey display and control depend on the configuration of additional functions/are executed regardless of additional functions. When a sequence number is searched for, the format is checked/is not checked. When the length of part program storage is 120 or 320 m, or if the background editing function is provided, memory is automatically compressed/ is not automatically compressed. At poweron, the MMC screen is displayed/CNC screen is displayed. If an alarm occurs in the CNC while the MMC screen is displayed, the MMC screen is displayed/CNC screen is displayed. If a system alarm occurs in the CNC while the MMC screen is displayed, the MMC screen is displayed/CNC screen is displayed. On the diagnostic screen, addresses are not displayed/are displayed. Dynamic ladder display is not executed/is executed. When a 14inch CRT is used, the diagnostic screen of the 9inch format is displayed/14inch format is displayed. Operating monitor display is invalid/valid. The function to search for or display a protected program is disabled/enabled. On a 9inch highresolution CRT, monochrome screens are displayed/color screens are displayed. In absolute and relative coordinates on the current position display, the coordinate on the seventh or eighth axis is not included/is included. Machine coordinates are not displayed according to the input system/are displayed according to the input system. Automatic coordinate system setting in the inch input mode is specified in parameter 0708 and subsequent parameters/in parameter 0815 and subsequent parameters. Presetting relative coordinates causes clearing to zero/optional values to be used. For presetting relative coordinates, the standard specification is selected/axes are selected by numeric keys. On the diagnostic screen, DI/DO of the I/O Link and an extended R/D area are not displayed/are displayed. If an alarm occurs or an operator message is input, the alarm or message screen is displayed instead/is not displayed. On the complete current position screen, the fifth or six axis is not displayed/is displayed. Input or output of an NC program can be stopped by an NC reset/only by pressing the [STOP] soft key.
0050#1 0056#0
NOFMK NOCND
0057#0 0057#1
PWNNC ALMNC
0057#2
SALNC
0060#0 0060#2 0060#3
DADRDP LDDSPG C14DGN
0060#5 0060#6 0060#7
OPMNDP EXTSP IGNCOL
0061#6
DSP78
0063#0
MTDSPI
0063#1
PRSTIN
0064#0 0064#1
SETREL ALLPRE
0064#3
IOMDGN
0064#5
NPA
0066#0 0076#2
ALL56 IOP
193
0077#2 0077#6
Symbol
SGD HLKEY
Description
Servo waveform display is invalid/valid. The MDI keys are not processed in the high speed mode/are processed in the highspeed mode. The amount of tool wear compensation can be input with the MDI keys/cannot be input with the MDI keys. The amount of tool geometry compensation can be input with the MDI keys/cannot be input with the MDI keys. A macro variable can be input with the MDI keys/ cannot be input with the MDI keys. An offset from the workpiece reference point can be input with the MDI keys/cannot be input with the MDI keys. The servo setting screen is displayed/is not displayed. If the automatic operation is started or halted, an offset from the workpiece reference point can be input with the MDI keys/cannot be input with the MDI keys. If PWE is set to 0, a PMC parameter cannot be input/can be input. On the offset screen, the cursor position is not retained/is retained. The contents of alarm 409 are not displayed/are displayed. With the MDI keys, an offset from the workpiece reference point is input in the ABS mode/INC mode. Character codes of the title Character codes of the NC name Increment used when the sequence number is automatically inserted Encryption Key
0078#0
NOINOW
0078#1
NOINOG
0078#2 0078#3
NOINMV NOINWZ
0389#0 0393#2
SRVSET WKNMDI
0393#7 0395#1 0397#7 0398#0
DGNWEB TLSCUR SERNAI WKINC
0337 to 0346 0351 to 0355 0550 0797 0798
(11) Parameters related to programming (1/2) No.

0010#4 0011#6 0015#7 0016#3 0019#5 0028#4 0029#5 0030#7
Symbol
PRG9 G01 CPRD NPRD M02NR EXTS MABS G91
Description
Editing of subprograms from O9000 to O9999 is not inhibited/is inhibited. The mode selected at poweron is G00/G01. If a decimal point is omitted, the selected unit is the least input increment/mm, inch, deg, and sec. Decimal point input or display is used/is not used. After M02 is executed, a return to the beginning of the program is made/is not made. External program number search is invalid/valid. In MDI operation B, the ABS or INC command depends on setting ABS/G90 or G91. The mode selected at poweron is G90/G91.
10
194
9. PARAMETERS
(11) Parameters related to programming (2/2) No.
0045#6
For M series
Symbol
CLER
Description
Pressing the RESET key, setting the external reset signal or an emergency stop sets the system in the reset state/clear state. When a reset occurs, MDIB programs are not cleared/are cleared. Address P of M198 is used with a file number/program number. A single block can contain only one M code/up to three M codes. Editing of programs from O8000 to 8999 is not inhibited/is inhibited. In the clear state, a specific G code is cleared/is not cleared. An M code specified with three digits is valid/invalid. When circular interpolation is specified, the difference between the radius values at the start point and end point is not checked/is checked. In workpiece coordinate system setting, an NC reset does not cause a return to G54/causes a return to G54. On the parameter, diagnostic, or offset screen, pressing the CAN key does not erase a single character/erases a single character. In the feed per rotation mode, the dwell command is specified with a time period/spindle speed. If EOR is read without the program end command, an alarm occurs/a reset occurs. M code which is not buffered Plane selected at poweron Program number for parameter, macro variable, or diagnostic data Program number registered in a simultaneous input/output operation Limit of arc radius error
0057#7 0063#2 0065#7 0389#2 0391#7 0393#3 0393#6
MBCLR M198P M3B PRG8 NOCLR M3PQNG RADCHK
0394#6
WKZRST
0394#7
CAKEY
0395#0 0396#7 0111, 0112 0212 0484 0634 0876
DLG99 EORRE
(12) Parameters related to pitch error compensation (1/1) No.

0011#0, #1 7011#0, #1 0712 to 0715 7713, 7714 1000 to 6000 1001 to 6128
Symbol
PML: PML:S
Description
(X to 4) Magnification of pitch error compensation (5, 6) (X to 4) Interval of pitch error compensation for each axis (5, 6) Reference position of pitch error compensation for each axis Pitch error compensation for each axis
195
(13) Parameters related to spindle control (1/2) No.

0003#5 0012#6
Symbol
GST G84S
Description
By SOR (G120, #5), spindle orientation is executed/a gearchange is executed. If the G74 or G84 cycle is specified, the gear is changed at a point specified through S analog output gearchange method A or B/at a point specified in parameters 0540 and 0556. In spindle orientation, S analog output is positive/ negative. Sign output in S analog output The spindle speed arrival signal is checked conditionally/always. SF (F150, #2) is output when a gearchange is made/even if a gearchange is not made. The spindle speed arrival signal SAR (G120, #4) is not checked/is checked. Gear ratio between the spindle and position coder Under constant surface speed control, SF (F150, #2) is output/is not output. The gearchange speed is the maximum speed of each gear (method A)/is determined by parameters 0585 and 0586 (method B). Axis used as the calculation standard under constant surface speed control Parameters of spindle speed control are specified in units of 1 RPM/10 RPM. For the first G00 command after the Cs contour control mode is selected, a reference position return is made, then positioning is executed/normal positioning is executed. For D/A conversion, the analog interface board is not used/is used. When the serial interface spindle is used, the position coder signal is fetched from the optical fiber cable/connector M27. The number of serial interface spindles connected is one/two. The serial interface spindle is not used/is used. For the first and second spindle motors, the spindle orientation function with the stop position set externally is not used/is used. The directions of rotation of the first and second spindles during synchronous control of the spindle are the same as the specified sign/are the opposite of the specified sign. Spindle speed in stable spindle rotation Spindle motor speed at a gearchange Delay timer if the spindle speed arrival signal SAR (G120, #4) is checked Permissible difference in the number of error pulses for phasing in the synchronous control mode Data for adjusting the gain under constant surface speed control (analog output)
0013#5 0013#6, #7 0014#0 0020#7 0024#2 0028#6, #7 0029#4 0035#6
ORCW TCW, CWM SCTA SFOUT SCTO PSG: FSOB LGCM
0041#4, #5 0062#3 0065#1
SSCA: SPMRPM CZRN
0070#0, #1 0071#0
DAC: ISRLPC
0071#4 0071#7 0080#2, #3
SRL2SP FSRSP MORCM:
0080#6, #7
SP:NEG
0108 0108 0110 0303
10
0516
196
9. PARAMETERS
0539 0541 0555 0540 to 0543 0540 0556 0542 0543 0551 0556 0576
For M series
Symbol

Description
[Neutral gear] Maximum spindle speed [Low gear] [High gear] Spindle speed when the voltage for specifying the spindle speed of each gear is 10 V [Neutral gear] Minimum spindle speed in a tapping cycle [High gear] Upper limit of the value output to the spindle motor Lower limit of the value output to the spindle motor Minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96) Maximum spindle speed for the constant surface speed control function Permissible error in the number of error pulses between two spindles in the mode of (simple) synchronous control of the spindle Spindle speed offset compensation Gearchange point in S analog switching method B (Channel 1) Data for adjusting the gain in analog output (Channel 2) (Channel 1) Offset compensation in analog output (Channel 2) Limit of position error during spindle rotation at the maximum spindle speed Position loop gain of the servo axis in the Cs contour control mode (X) Position loop gain of the servo axis in the Cs contour control mode of each gear (Y) (Z) (4) Data for adjusting the gain under subspindle control by the S command specified with four or five digits Subspindle speed offset compensation
0577 0585, 0586 0673 0677 0674 0678 0957 to 0959 6780 to 6783 6784 to 6787 6788 to 6791 6792 to 6795 6796 to 6799 7516
7539
197
(14) Parameters related to tool compensation (1/1) No.

0001#3 0003#6
Symbol
RS43 TSLT
Description
When a reset occurs, the vector of tool length compensation is cleared/is not cleared. Tool length compensation is executed on the Z axis (type A)/an axis vertical to the specified plane (type B). In cutter compensation C, startup and cancellation are executed through the method of type A/B. Tool length compensation A or B/C Tool compensation memory C is disable/enabled. In tool length compensation of type C, offset of two or more axes is disabled/enabled. Tool length compensation and cutter compensation are specified with the H code./Tool length compensation and cutter compensation C are specified with the H code and D code, respectively. Operation by a single command (G40, G41, or G42) Maximum travel distance that can be ignored on the outside of a corner in cutter compensation C
0016#2
SUPM
0019#3 0030#2 0036#5 0036#6
TLCD OFCDH TLCDOK OFRD
0062#2 0557
G40V
(15) Parameters related to canned cycles (1/2) No.

0002#4, #5 0011#4
Symbol
PMXY1, 2 MCF
Description
Axis and direction on and in which the tool is retracted in canned cycle G76 or G87 When positioning of G81 terminates, the signal to specify an external operation function is not output/is output. In canned cycle G74 or G84, reverse and forward spindle rotations are executed after M05 is output/even if M05 is not output. In canned cycle G76 or G87, an oriented spindle stop is executed after M05 is output/even if M05 is not output. The drilling axis in a canned cycle is always the Zaxis/is a programmed axis. M code for smalldiameter peck drilling cycle Spindle speed change ratio for smalldiameter peck drilling cycle Cutting feedrate change ratio for smalldiameter peck drilling cycle Minimum cutting feedrate ratio for smalldiameter peck drilling cycle Number of macro variable for counting number of retractions Number of macro variable for counting number of times overload signal has been received Using the overload torque signal, the feedrate and spindle speed are not changed/are changed. Without using the overload torque signal, the feedrate and spindle speed are not changed/are changed.
0012#4
FXCS
0012#5
FXCO
0057#6 0304 0305, 0306 0307, 0308 0309 0327 0328 0398#6 0398#7
FXY CHGSKP CHGNRM
10
198
9. PARAMETERS
0403 0492 0493 0531 0532 0941
For M series
Symbol

Description
Clearance/cutting start point in a peck tapping cycle Feedrate of retraction to the R position when address I is omitted Feedrate of forward movement from the R position when address I is omitted Clearance in canned cycle G73 (highspeed peck drilling cycle) Cutting start point in canned cycle G83 (peck drilling cycle) Clearance for smalldiameter peck drilling cycle
(16) Parameters related to rigid tapping (1/2) No.

0019#4 0035#5
Symbol
SRGTP RGCTO
Description
The rigid tapping selection signal (RGTAP) is G123, #1/G135, #0. When the tool is retracted in rigid tapping, the time constant of acceleration/deceleration on the spindle and tapping axis is the same parameter as that for starting cutting/is a different parameter from that for starting cutting. In rigid tapping, the variable time constant switching function is not used/is used. In rigid tapping, the rigid mode is canceled after the rigid DI signal is turned off/even before the rigid DI signal is turned off. An optional gear ratio between the spindle and position coder is not used/is used. When the tool is retracted, an override is disabled/enabled. During tapping, a dry run is enabled/disabled. G84 and G74 are not handled as G codes for rigid tapping/are handled as G codes for rigid tapping. Threestage time constant switching is disabled/ enabled. A peck tapping cycle is handled as a highspeed peck tapping cycle. A feed hold and singleblock operation are enabled/disabled. When rigid tapping is started, a spindle reference position return is not made/is made. At a gearchange, the SIND signal is disabled/ enabled. During spindle rotation, the position error is checked according to the maximum spindle speed/specified spindle speed. Type of acceleration/deceleration for the spindle and tapping axis Spindle backlash amount in rigid tapping M code for specifying the rigid tapping mode Override value when the tool is retracted in rigid tapping Override for rigid tapping return
0037#6 0040#2
VALT RGTPE
0063#3 0063#4 0065#5 0076#3 0077#1 0388#0 0388#2 0388#3 0388#5 0388#6
VSLPC RGDOV TAPDRN G84RGD CT3G PCTPH RGMFH RGORT SIG CHKERC
0254 0255 0256 0258 0378
199

0400 to 0402
Symbol
Description
Time constant of acceleration/deceleration on the spindle and tapping axis when the tool is retracted Time constant of acceleration/deceleration on the spindle and tapping axis FL speed of exponential acceleration/deceleration on the spindle and tapping axis Loop gain of position control on the spindle and tapping axis (Low gear) Multiplier of loop gain on the spindle (Neutral gear) (High gear) Allowable maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping Effective area on the tapping axis in rigid tapping Effective area on the spindle in rigid tapping Limit of position error on the tapping axis during traveling Limit of position error on the spindle during traveling Limit of position error on the tapping axis under a stop Limit of position error on the spindle under a stop Feedrate for defining the reference lead in rigid tapping Position error on the spindle in rigid tapping Spindle pulse distribution in rigid tapping Number of teeth on the spindle when an optional gear ratio is selected Number of teeth on the position coder when an optional gear ratio is selected Loop gain of position control (Low gear) Time constant of acceleration/deceleration on the spindle and tapping axis (Neutral gear) (Low gear) Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Neutral gear) Instantaneous difference between errors on the spindle and tapping axis Maximum difference between errors on the spindle and tapping axis Integrated spindle pulse distribution in rigid tapping Amount of return a for rigid tapping return
0613 0614 0615 0616 0624 0625 0617 0618 0619 0620 0621 0622 0623 0626 0627 0628 0663 to 0665 0666 to 0668 0669 to 0671 0692
0693 0694 0695 0696 0697 0799 0960
10
200
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
(17) Parameters related to scaling and coordinate system rotation (1/1) No.
0036#0 to #2 0036#7 0041#0
Symbol
SCL: SRC RIN The unit of 0.00001/0.001.
Description
Scaling for each axis is disabled/enabled. scaling magnification is
An angle of coordinate system rotation is always specified in the absolute mode/is specified according to G90 or G91. Scaling and programmable mirror image on each axis are disabled/enabled. Angle assumed when the angle of coordinate system rotation is not specified Magnification assumed when a scaling magnification is not specified
0063#6 0730 0731 to 0733
ESCAL
(18) Parameters related to unidirectional positioning (1/1) No.

0029#0 to #3 0204 to 0207
Symbol
G60:
Description
In unidirectional positioning (G60) for each axis, the direction of approach is positive/negative. Distance of approach in unidirectional positioning for each axis
(19) Parameters related to control in the normal direction (1/1) No.

0683 0832
Symbol

Description
Rotation speed around a controlled axis in the normal direction Limit up to which an inserted rotation around a controlled axis in the normal direction can be ignored Limit on travel distance that can be executed with the angle in the normal direction of the previous block
0833
(20) Parameters related to index table indexing (1/1) No.

0079#0
Symbol
IXDDP
Description
For the axis of index table indexing, the decimal point is input using the conventional method/ pocketcalculator method. On the screen, relative coordinates on the indexing axis which are not multiples of 360_ are not rounded/are rounded. On the screen, absolute coordinates on the indexing axis which are not multiples of 360_ are not rounded/are rounded. When the M code for rotation in the negative direction is not specified, the direction of rotation in the G90 mode minimizes the distance of rotation/does not minimize the distance of rotation. An index command depends on specification of the G90 or G91 mode/always assumed that the G90 mode. Sequence of type A/type B Code specifying a rotation in the negative direction Minimum angle in index table indexing
0079#1
IXREL
0079#2
IXABS
0079#3
IXINC
0079#4
IXG90
0079#7 0249 0839
IXTYP
201
(21) Parameters related to custom macro (1/1) No.

0011#5 0040#1
Symbol
SBKM DPOSUP
Description
By a macro statement, a singleblock stop is not made/is made. If data is output by the DPRINT command, leading zeros are output as space characters/as they are. A T code is processed as the code of the tool function/code for calling O9000. When a reset occurs, common variables (#100 to #149) are made null/are not made null. When a reset occurs, local variables (#01 to #33) are made null/are not made null. Hole pattern of the EIA code of an asterisk (*) Hole pattern of the EIA code of an equal sign (=) Hole pattern of the EIA code of a sharp (#) Hole pattern of the EIA code of a square bracket ([) Hole pattern of the EIA code of a square bracket (]) At an interrupt, absolute coordinates are not set as skip coordinates/are set as skip coordinates. Custom macro interrupt of type I/type II The interrupt signal uses the edge trigger method/status trigger method. The M codes for enabling and disabling an interrupt are M96 and M97 respectively/are specified in parameters. When an interrupt occurs, local variables are of the macro type/subprogram type. During a cycle operation, a custom macro interrupt is disabled/enabled. The custom macro interrupt function is disabled/ enabled. After data output in ISO code is completed with B/D PRINT, LF is output/CR/LF is output. G code for calling custom macro from O9010 to O9019 M code for calling a custom macro from O9020 to O9029 M code for calling a subprogram from O9001 to O9003 M code for enabling a custom macro interrupt M code for disabling a custom macro interrupt M code for calling a program registered in a file
0040#5 0040#6 0040#7 0042 0043 0044 0053 0054 0056#1 0056#2 0056#3 0056#4
TMCR COMC LOCC ASTCD EQCD SHPCD LBLCD RBLCD MSKT MBLK MSTE MPRM
0056#5 0056#6 0056#7 0057#4 0220 to 0229 0230 to 0239 0240 to 0242 0246 0247 0248
MSUB MCYL MUSR CROUT
10
(22) Parameters related to automatic tool length measurement (1/1) No.
0558 0813 0814
Symbol

Description
Feedrate during automatic tool length measurement Value of g in automatic tool length measurement Value of e in automatic tool length measurement
202
9. PARAMETERS
(23) Parameters related to graphic display (1/1) No.
0046#5
For M series
Symbol
GRPOS
Description
On the screen of a solid drawing or tool path drawing, the current position is not displayed/is displayed. If the coordinate system is changed during drawing, drawing is executed on the same coordinate system/on the assumption that the current drawing point is the current position set in the new coordinate system. During drawing of a solid drawing, tool length compensation is not executed/is executed. During drawing of a solid drawing, a triplane drawing is drawn with the first angle projection/ third angle projection. During drawing of a solid drawing, a top view is drawn without ridgelines/with ridgelines. During drawing of a solid drawing, a machining profile is drawn in the coarse mode/fine mode. On a tool path drawing, the current tool position or the center of a partial magnification is marked with J / . Change in the position of the cross section on a triplane drawing Margin on a solid drawing Dot shift of 9inch highresolution graphic display
0058#0
SGORG
0058#1 0058#2
SGTLC SG3PL
0058#3 0058#4 0058#5
SGPLN SGFIN SGCSR
0253 0589 to 0592 0630, 0631
(24) Parameters related to the display of operation time and number of parts (1/1) No.
0040#3
Symbol
RWCNT
Description
With M02 or M30, the total number of parts to be machined and the number of parts machined are counted/are not counted. M code for counting the total number of parts to be machined and the number of parts machined Number of parts required Total number of parts to be machined
0219 0600 0779
203
(25) Parameters related to tool life management (1/1) No.

0039#0, #1 0039#2 0039#3
Symbol
GST: LCTM TLSK
Description
Number of tool groups that can be registered The tool life is specified in terms of the number of times used/time period. If the tool skip signal TLSKP (G140, #0) is input, the current group is skipped/the group number is input together. If the tool skip signal TLSKP (G140, #0) is input, the execution data of the current group is cleared/ the execution data of all groups is cleared. The tool skip signal TLSKP (G140, #0) is accepted always/only while a tool under tool life management is used. The tool back numbers are not ignored/are ignored. A T code in the block containing M06 is assumed as a back number/the command of the group to be selected next. If a T code is specified in the block containing M06 under tool life management, the T code is processed as a back number or the number of the group to be selected next/the counting of the life of the tool group is started immediately. M code for resuming the counting of the tool life Number with which tool life management is ignored
0039#4
GRST
0039#5
IGSK
0039#6 0039#7
IGIN M6TCD
0041#7
M6TST
0336 0599
6
(26) Parameters related to the position switch function (1/1) No.
0310 to 0319 0840 to 0849 0850 to 0859
Symbol

Description
Axis corresponding to the position switch Maximum value in the operating area of the position switch Minimum value in the operating area of the position switch
8
(27) Parameters related to manual handle feed/manual handle interrupt (1/2) No.
0002#6 0003#7
Symbol
TJHD HLSE
Description
During teaching in jog mode, the manual pulse generator is disabled/enabled. If the manual pulse generators for three units are mounted, the axis selection signal is disabled/ enabled. In the jog mode, the manual pulse generator is disable/enabled. For each axis, the magnification of handle feed (x 100) is enabled/disabled. Multihandle function of specification A/specification B If the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated quickly, the reading and travel distance may not agree/the travel distance depends on the reading.
10
0013#0 0018#0 to #3 0019#0 0060#4
JHD N:MP2 MHPGB HDLPM
204
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
0075#2
Symbol
INHND
Description
The travel increment of manual handle interrupt is set as the output unit and acceleration/deceleration is disabled/input unit and acceleration/ deceleration is enabled. For each axis, the magnification of manual handle feed (x 1000) is enabled/disabled. Manual handle pulse generator of the Zaxis or the fourth axis Number of manual pulse generators used Magnification of manual handle feed (M) Magnification of manual handle feed (specification B)
0386#4 to #7 0117 0118 0121 0699
HDPIG:
(28) Parameters related to the software operators panel (1/1) No.

0017#0 0017#1
Symbol
OPG1 OPG2
Description
On the software operators panel, the mode is not selected/is selected. On the software operators panel, the selection of a jog feed axis or rapid traverse is not executed/is executed. On the software operators panel, the selection of the manual pulse generator axis switch or magnification switch is not executed/is executed. On the software operators panel, jog feedrate override switch is not executed/is executed. On the software operators panel, BDT, SBK, MLK, or DRN switch is not executed/is executed. On the software operators panel, protect switch is not executed/is executed. On the software operators panel, feed hold switch is not executed/is executed. Axis and direction of jog feed corresponding to keys on the software operators panel Character code of generalpurpose switches on the software operators panel
0017#2
OPG3
0017#3 0017#4 0017#5 0017#6 0130 to 0137 0140 to 0203
OPG4 OPG5 OPG6 OPG7
(29) Parameters related to program resumption (1/1) No.

0387#0 0124 to 0127
Symbol
SQDNC
Description
During DNC operation, program resumption is disabled/enabled. Sequence of a jump to the program resumption point
(30) Parameters related to the highspeed cycle machining/highspeed remote buffer (1/1) No.
0055#4 to #6 0597
Symbol
ITPCNT
Description
Interval compensated for by G05 data Number of controlled axes of the highspeed remote buffer. Maximum number of axes that can be simultaneously controlled in highspeed cycle machining
205
(31) Parameters related to PMC axis control (1/1) No.

0024#0 0030#0, #1 0032#4 7032#4 0032#6 0049#5 0052#0 to #7
Symbol
IGNPMC EAC: PNGMLK PNGMLKS EACSB EFML10 NODIC:
Description
PMC axis control is enabled/disabled. Axis setting for executing PMC axis control (specification A) On a PMC axis, a machine lock is enabled/disabled. PMC axis control of specification A/specification B Under PMC axis control, the specified feedrate (cutting feed) is multiplied by one/ten. Under PMC axis control, the current position display depends on the position of the decimal point with increment system 1 or 10/depends on the standard specifications. Under PMC axis control (specification B), DI and DO used for each axis are of group A/B. To the actual speed display, traveling along a PMC controlled axis is added/is not added. On a PMC axis, a dry run and override are disabled/enabled. The skip signal used under PMC axis control is the same as the corresponding signal of the CNC/is a unique signal. Magnification of the speed of feed per rotation under PMC axis control Under PMC axis control, the speed increases when the override signal is set to 0/1. Under PMC axis control, a dry run for the rapid traverse command is disable/enabled. The dry run signal and override signal used under PMC axis control are the same as the corresponding signals of the CNC/are unique signals. Under PMC axis control, the parameter of the rapid traverse rate is the same as that of the CNC/ the rapid traverse rate is determined by the feedrate data specified with the axis control command. Axis for which the velocity command is executed under PMC axis control Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration for the velocity specified with the velocity command (X to 4) FL speed of exponential acceleration/ deceleration on a PMC axis during cutting feed (5, 6) FL speed on a PMC controlled axis during reference position return F0 speed of independent rapid traverse override on a PMC controlled axis Maximum speed of feed per rotation about a PMC controlled axis PMC controlled axes on the subCPU are the fifth and sixth axes/the fifth axis only.
0061#0 to #5 0062#6 0063#5 7063#5 0066#3
EBC: AXPCF EAXOV EAXOVS EPMSKP
0066#6, #7 0078#4 0078#6 0078#7
ERVF: OVRIE RDRNE EAXOVE
0387#7
EFERPD
0350 0462
0657 to 0662
7657, 7658 0672 0685 0698 7021#6
SUB1
10
206
9. PARAMETERS
For M series
(32) Parameters related to the surface grinding machine (slanted axis control) (1/1) No.
0077#4
Symbol
ZRTM1
Description
When a manual reference position return is performed on the Yaxis, movement occurs on the Zaxis/does not occur on the Zaxis. Slanted axis control is not executed/is executed. Slant angle of the Yaxis Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel when the diameter is checked
0077#5 0837 0838
AGLST
(33) Parameters related to simple synchronous control (1/1) No.

0075#0, #1 0475
Symbol
SYNM:
Description
Master axis under simple synchronous control Limit of difference between position errors of the master axis and slave axis
(34) Parameters related to the PMC (1/1) No.

0028#1
Symbol
PRCMSG
Description
On the program check screen, the remaining travel distance is displayed/a message from the PMC is displayed. The baud rate during ladder loading is 4800 bps/9600 bps. The R or D area of the PMCM is not extended/is extended. With the PMC RAM board, PMC LOAD MENU is displayed/is not displayed. Number of characters that can be displayed in the remaining travel distance field on the program check screen First PMC address at which the characters in the remaining travel distance field are set
0060#1 0070#6 0071#6 0356 to 0359
PCLDB PEXRD DPCRAM
0476 to 0479
(35) Parameters related to the function for setting the zero point using the butt method (1/1) No.
0360 to 0363 0942, 0943 0944 to 0947
Symbol

Description
Torque limit when the cycle for setting the zero point using the butt method is in progress Butt speed when the cycle for setting the zero point using the butt method is executed Traveling speed when the zero point is set in the cycle for setting the zero point using the butt method Distance for setting the zero point when the cycle for setting the zero point using the butt method is executed
0948 to 0951
207
(36) Parameters related to the DNC (1/1) No.

0390#7 0320 0321 0323 0324 0325
Symbol
NODC3
Description
During DNC operation, reading is executed for each block/until the buffer is filled. Timeout period of the noresponse timer Timeout period of the EOT signal timer Maximum illegal data count Maximum number of times a message is resent by NAK Maximum number of characters that can be received after processing to stop transmission is completed Format of connection between the CNC and the host on the DNC1 interface Station address of the CNC on the DNC1 interface Maximum length of the datagram (data section)
0347 0348 0490
(37) Parameters related to the MNET (1/1) No.

0392#2 0392#4 0392#5 0392#7 0259 0260 0261 0262 0458
Symbol
SRL1 SRPE SREP SRS2
Description
The character length of the MNET is 7 bits/8 bits. The vertical parity check of the MNET is not executed/is executed. The vertical parity of the MNET is an odd parity/ even parity. The stop bit of the MNET is bit 1/bit 2. Byte length of DI of the MNET Byte length of DO of the MNET Station address of the MNET Baud rate of the MNET Timer monitor value after the sequence preparing for a connection to the same station is completed Polling time monitor value in the normal sequence to the same station Timer monitor value from the beginning of SAI transmission to the end of BCC transmission Timer value from the end of reception to the beginning of transmission Destination address of the spindle orientation signal
0459 0460 0461 0463
10
208
9. PARAMETERS
For T series
List of Parameters for each Function (for Lathe)

(1) Parameters related to setting (2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface/remote buffers (3) Parameters related to controlled axes/increment systems (4) Parameters related to coordinate systems (5) Parameters related to stroke limits (6) Parameters related to the feedrate (7) Parameters related to acceleration/deceleration control (8) Parameters related to the servo system (9) Parameters related to DI/DO (10) Parameters related to CRT/MDI, display, and editing (11) Parameters related to programs (12) Parameters related to pitch error compensation (13) Parameters related to spindle control (14) Parameters related to tool compensation (15) Parameters related to canned cycles (16) Parameters related to rigid tapping (17) Parameters related to custom macros (18) Parameters related to automatic tool compensation (19) Parameters related to graphic display (20) Parameters related to run time/parts count display (21) Parameters related to tool life management (22) Parameters related to the position switch function (23) Parameters related to manual handle feed/manual handle interrupt (24) Parameters related to the software operators panel (25) Parameters related to restarting programs (26) Parameters related to highspeed cycle machining/highspeed remote buffers (27) Parameters related to PMCbased axis control (28) Parameters related to cylindrical grinding machines (GC) (29) Parameters related to the PMC (30) Parameters related to the butttype reference position setting function (31) Parameters related to the DNC (32) Parameters related to the MNET (33) Parameters related to the Cfaxis (34) Parameters related to 2path lathes (TT) (35) Parameters related to polygon turning (36) Parameters related to synchronized control/axis recomposition NOTE 1 In the explanation of each bit parameter, the lefthand side of a slash (/) indicates the state when the bit is set to 0, and the right hand side of a slash indicates the state when the bit is set to 1. Example: The current setting is 0/1. NOTE 2 For details, see Parameter Explanation.
209
(1) Parameters related to setting (1/1) No.

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Symbol
TVON ISO INCH I/O SEQ PWE TAPEF PRGNO SEQNO
Description
A TV check is not performed/is performed for program registration. EIA/ISO is used as the code system for program output. The metric/inch system is used as the least input increment (input unit) for programs. Input/output unit used via the reader/punch interface Automatic sequence number insertion is not performed/is performed. Parameter write operation is disabled/enabled. Tape format is not converted/is converted. Program number for which sequence number reference is to be stopped Sequence number for which sequence number reference is to be stopped
(2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface/remote buffers (1/2) No.

0002#0 0012#0 0050#0 0051#0 0002#2 0012#2 0002#3 0012#3 0050#3 0051#3 0002#7 0012#7 0050#7 0051#7 0015#5 0015#6
Symbol
STP2 STP2 STP2 STP2 ASR33 ASR33 RSASCI RSASCI RSASCI RSASCI NFED NFED NFED NFED PRWD REP
Description
(I/O=0) The number of stop bits is 1/2. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) (I/O=0) FANUC PPR, etc./20mA current interface (I/O=1) (I/O=0) ISO or EIA/ASCII is used as the input code. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) (I/O=0) Line feed codes are output/not output before and after data output. (I/O=1) (I/O=2) (I/O=3) The rewind signal is not output/is output to a portable tape reader. If the same program number is already contained in memory when programs are registered via the reader/punch interface, an alarm is issued/the program is replaced. In a program comment, a TV check is not performed/is performed. (I/O=3) Input/output unit setting (I/O=2) (I/O=0,1) (I/O=3) A parity bit is not provided/is provided. When protocol B is used, SYN and NAK code output control is not exercised/exercised. With the remote buffer interface, the CD (signal quality detection) state is monitored/not monitored. An internal/external clock is used for the remote buffer baud rate clock.
0018#6 0038#1, #2 0038#4, #5 0038#6, #7 0051#1 0051#2 0051#4
TVC
:::, ::: :::, ::: :::, :::
10
PARTY SYNAK NCKCD
0051#5
ECKL
210
9. PARAMETERS
For T series
(2) Parameters related to the reader/punch interface/remote buffers (2/2) No.

0055#0 0055#1 0055#2 0055#3 0055#7
Symbol
ASCII ETX PROTCA RS42 RMSTS
Description
ISO/ASCII code is used for communication of all data except NC data. The end code is CR/ETX. Communication protocol B/A is used. The remote buffer RS232C/RS422. interface is
When protocol A is used with the remote buffer interface, remote buffer state data in an SAT message is always sent back with no specification (=0)/a switching request in a SET message from the host is sent back unconditionally. In output using ISO code, the EOB code consists of an LF, CR, and CR/LF. When a null character is included in EIA code being read, an alarm is not issued/is issued. When reader/punch interface 2 is used, rewind is not performed/is performed. When the RS232C interface is used, the DC code is used/not used. For feed operation in a significant information section, space/null characters are used. (I/O=2) Baud rate (I/O=3) (I/O=0) (I/O=1)
0070#7 0075#7 0076#5 0391#6 0399#6 0250 0251 0552 0553
ICR IONUL PRWD RS23BN FEDNUL
(3) Parameters related to controlled axes/increment systems (1/2) No.

0001#0 7001#0 0003#0 to #3
Symbol
SCW SCWS ZM:
Description
The metric/inch system is used for the least command increment (output unit) for linear axes. (X to 4) The reference position return direction and initial direction are positive/ negative. (7, 8) (5, 6) For the Xaxis, a diameter/radius is specified. The input/output unit is ISB/ISA. (3, 4) (3, 4) (7, 8) (5, 6) Axis name (Display) (Command) (Display) (Display)
0066#4, #5 7003#0, #1 0019#2 0024#1 0030#0, #4 0210, 0211 0285, 0286 7130, 7131 0032#2, #3 0062#4, #5 7032#0, #1 0032#7 7032#7 0049#4 0057#3 XRC LII10 ADW:0 LIN: ADLIN: ROT: ROT10 ROT10S S3JOG MIC
The third and fourth axes are rotation axes/linear axes. The seventh and eighth axes are rotation axes/ linear axes. (5, 6) Linear axis/rotation axis The parameter unit for inch output is 0.1 [deg/ min]/1 [deg/min]. The maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes in manual operation is 1/3. When the decimal point is omitted, the least input increment is not multiplied by 10/multiplied by 10. The eighth axis is enabled/disabled.
0062#7
C8NG
211
(3) Parameters related to controlled axes/increment systems (2/2) No.

0066#1
Symbol
NBD78
Description
When the number of controlled axes is greater than the number of servo axes, the extension of one controlled axis is disabled/enabled. As a command address for the third and fourth axes, B is not used/used. Incremental or absolute command address for the third and fourth axes If a command other than G28 specifies a movement by automatic operation when reference position return is not performed, an alarm is not issued/is issued. The function for setting the reference position without dogs is disabled/enabled. Manual reference position return operation for a rotation axis is not performed/is performed linearly. The rollover function for absolute coordinates is disabled/enabled. When the ABS command is specified, the direction of rotation is the direction with the shortest distance/follows the sign of the specified value. The rollover function for relative coordinates is disabled/enabled. P/S 090 is enabled/disabled. The function for setting the reference position without dogs is enabled/disabled. If there is distance remaining to travel in manual reference position return, or a miscellaneous function is being executed, an alarm (P/S 091) is issued/not issued. Servo axis number Attributes of the third and fourth axes Axis synchronized with the X/Zaxis or the third/fourth axis in synchronized control Linear axis/rotation axis to which polar coordinate interpolation is applied
0069#4 0069#5, #6 0074#0 to #3
BAX
::::
CRF:
0076#1 0385#6
JZRN RTLIN
0388#1 0388#2
ROAXC RODRC
0388#3 0388#5 0391#0 to #5 0399#7
ROCNT IGPS90 JZRN: OUTZRN
0269 to 0274 0279, 0280 0281, 0282 0291, 0292
10
212
9. PARAMETERS
0002#1 0010#6 0010#7 7010#7 0028#5
For T series
Symbol
PPD WSFT APRS APRSS RSFT
Description
Relative coordinates are not preset/are preset by coordinate system setting. Workpiece coordinate system shift operation is not performed/is performed. Automatic coordinate system setting is not performed/is performed in manual reference position return operation. In direct input of a workpiece coordinate system shift amount, a diameter value/radius value is entered for the value of MX. The local coordinate system is not canceled/is canceled in manual reference position return. In workpiece coordinate system setting, the workpiece coordinate system is not returned/is returned to G54 by an NC reset. The workpiece shift and offset from the external workpiece reference point are not stored/are stored in the same memory location. (X to 4) Reference position coordinates in automatic coordinate system setting (X to 8) (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Distance of the second reference position from the first reference position (7, 8) (X to 4) Distance of the third reference position from the first reference position (7, 8) (X to 4) Distance of the fourth reference position from the first reference position (7, 8) Travel distance per rotation of a rotation axis Offset from the external workpiece reference point for each axis Offset from the first workpiece reference point for each axis (G54) Offset from the second workpiece reference point for each axis (G55) Offset from the third workpiece reference point for each axis (G56) Offset from the fourth workpiece reference point for each axis (G57) Offset from the fifth workpiece reference point for each axis (G58) Offset from the sixth workpiece reference point for each axis (G59) Machine coordinate system when the fifth/sixth axis is a rotation axis
0075#6 0388#6
CLCL WKZRST
0388#7
WKZSFT
0708 to 711 0815 to 0820 0825, 0826 7708, 7709 0735 to 0738
0866, 0867 0780 to 0783 0868, 0869 0784 to 0787 0870, 0871 0788 0940 to 0943 0944 to 0947 0948 to 0951 0952 to 0955 0956 to 0959 0960 to 0963 0964 to 0967 7717
213
(5) Parameters related to stroke limits (1/1) No.

0015#2 0020#4 0024#4 0065#3
Symbol
COTZ LM2 INOUT PSOT
Description
The hardware overtravel signals (X018#5 *+LZ, X040#6 *LZS) are valid/invalid. The switching signal for the second stored stroke limit is invalid/valid. The outofrange area of the third stored stroke limit is the inside/outside. A stored stroke limit check is performed/is not performed until reference position return operation is performed. An alarm is issued after/before a stroke limit is exceeded. (X to 4) First stored stroke limit in the positive direction for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) First stored stroke limit in the negative direction for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Third stored stroke limit in the positive direction for each axis Third stored stroke limit in the negative direction for each axis Fourth stored stroke limit in the positive direction for each axis Fourth stored stroke limit in the negative direction for each axis Second stored stroke limit in the positive direction for each axis Second stored stroke limit in the negative direction for each axis
0076#7 0700 to 0703 0821, 0822 7700, 7701 0704 to 0707 0823, 0824 7704, 7705 0747 to 0750 0751 to 0754 0760 to 0763 0764 to 0767 0770 to 0773 0774 to 0777
OTRFOM

0001#6 7001#6 0008#4 0008#5 0010#0 0015#3
Symbol
RDRN RDRNS MFPR ROVE ISOT SKPF
Description
For a rapid traverse command, dry run is disabled/enabled. Manual synchronized feed (feed by spindle rotation) is disabled/enabled. The rapid traverse override signal (G117#7 ROV2) is valid/invalid. When no reference position is established, manual rapid traverse is disabled/enabled. When G31 is specified, dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled/ enabled. Manual reference position return is not performed/performed at the jog feedrate. When no position coder is used, the command for feed per rotation is disabled/enabled. The units of the parameters for setting the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are not multiplied/are multiplied by 10.
0041#2 0049#6 0049#7
ZRNJF NPRV FML10
10
214
9. PARAMETERS
0059#0, #1
For T series
Symbol
EDP:
Description
For a plusdirection command for each axis, external deceleration is enabled only for rapid traverse/external deceleration is enabled for rapid traverse and cutting feed. For negativedirection commands for each axis, external deceleration is enabled only for rapid traverse/external deceleration is enabled for rapid traverse and cutting feed. The parameters for a Zaxis time constant in threading and for an FL feedrate for acceleration/ deceleration are common to all axes/Nos. 0627 and 0628. The unit of the feedrate specified in F is 1 [mm/ min]/0.001 [mm/min]. In rapid traverse, the tool is not stopped/stopped when a cutting feedrate override of 0% is specified. The rapid traverse override for threading cycle retraction is the parameterspecified value/100 [%]. The 1%step feedrate override signal is invalid/ valid. During polar coordinate interpolation, if the specified rotation axis feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate, the command is output as is/the command is split. (X to 4) Rapid traverse rate for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Maximum allowable cutting feedrate FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration along the Xaxis in threading (G92) (X to 4) FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed (5, 6) (X to 4) F0 feedrate for rapid traverse override (5, 6) (X to 4) FL feedrate for reference position return (5, 6) FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in manual feed Jog rapid traverse rate for each axis FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in manual feed for each axis FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration along the Zaxis in threading (G92) Feedrate for external deceleration (X to 4) FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for PMC axes (5, 6)
0059#3, #4
EDM:
0065#5
G92ZAX
0077#5 0393#5
MICRF STOV0
0394#1
TFHOVR
0397#2 0399#2
OVR255 PLAUT
0518 to 0521 0643, 0644 7518, 7519 0527 0528 0530 7530 0533 7533 0534 7534 0548 0559 to 0562 0605 to 0608 0628 0636 0657 to 0662
7657, 7658
215
(7) Parameters related to acceleration/deceleration control(1/1) No.

0020#5 0045#3
Symbol
NCIPS LSUP
Description
An inposition check is performed/is not performed. For acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed, exponential acceleration/deceleration/linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse block overlap is invalid/valid. The parameters for a Zaxis time constant in threading and for an FL feedrate for acceleration/ deceleration are common to all axes/Nos. 0627 and 0628. (X to 4) Time constant for rapid traverse using linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Time constant for the Xaxis in threading (G92) Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed and manual feed (5, 6) Feedrate ratio at which the next block is started for rapid traverse block overlap (X to 4) Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in manual feed for each axis Time constant for the Zaxis in threading (G92) Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed (X to 8) Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for PMC axes (5, 6)
0050#4 0065#5
SMZCT G92ZAX
0522 to 0525
0645, 0646 7522, 7523 0526 0529 7529 0555 0601 to 0604
0627 0635 0651 to 0656
7651, 7652
7
Description
(8) Parameters related to the servo system (1/3) No.

0004 to 0007 0067, 0068 7004, 7005 0570 to 0575 7570, 7511 0004 to 0007 0067, 0068 7004, 7005 0010#2 7010#2 0021#0 to #5 7021#0, #1 0021#6
Symbol
GRD: GRD: GRD: DMR: DMR: DMR: OFFVY OFFVYS APC: APC: NOFLUP
(X to 4) Size of a reference counter for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Detection multiplication factor (DMR) for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) If VRDY=1 is set before PRDY=1, an alarm is issued/is not issued. (X to 8) For each axis, an absoluteposition detector is not used/used. (5, 6) When the power is turned on before a reference position is established with an absoluteposition detector, followup operation is performed/is not performed.
10
216
9. PARAMETERS
0022#0 to #5
For T series
Symbol
ABS:
Description
(X to 8) A reference position is not established/is already established with an absoluteposition detector. (5, 6) (X to 8) An arbitrary CMR is not used/is used. (5, 6) (X to 8) An arbitrary CMR is not used/is used. (5, 6) (X to 8) As a position detector, a separate pulse coder is not used/is used. (5, 6) (X to 8) A highresolution pulse coder is not used/is used. (5, 6) The threading start type is type A/type B. Cutting feed and rapid traverse separate backlash compensation is invalid/valid. When the torque limit skip function is used, the servo error present at the time of skipping is recovered/not recovered. When a reference position is not established upon powerup, an alarm is issued/is not issued to request reference position return when an absolute pulse coder is used for each axis. When a servo alarm is detected by the CNC, followup operation is performed/is not performed. (X to 4) Command multiplication factor (CMR) for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) Time interval for averaged current value display on the servo adjustment screen Servo axis number (X to 8 3RD WORD) Counter value at the APC reference position (X to 4 LOWER 2 WORD) (7, 8 LOWER 2 WORD) (5, 6 3RD WORD) (5, 6 LOWER 2 WORD) (X to 4) Inposition width for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Limit of position deviation during movement along each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Grid shift for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Position control loop gain for each axis (X to 8) Position control loop gain common to all axes (7, 8) Position control loop gain for each axis (5, 6)
7022#0, #1 0035#7 7035#7 0035#7 7035#7 0037#0 to #5 7037#0, #1 0037#7 7037#7 0041#1 0076#4 0389#3
ABS: ACMR ACMRS ACMR ACMRS SPTP: SPTP: PLCO1 PLCO1S THRDB ADBLS TSKECR
0390#0 to #5
NREQ:
0399#4 0100 to 0103 0275, 0276 7100, 7101 0255 0269 to 0274 0452 to 0457 0739 to 0742 0827, 0828 7580, 7581 7739, 7740 0500 to 0503 0637, 0638 7500, 7501 0504 to 0507 0639, 0640 7504, 7505 0508 to 0511 0641, 0642 7508, 7509 0512 to 0515 0517 0632, 0633 7517
FUNO
217

0535 to 0538 0647, 0648 7535, 7536 0593 to 0596 0649, 0650 7593, 7594 0673 to 0678
Symbol

Description
(X to 4) Backlash compensation for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Limit of position deviation in the stop state for each axis (7, 8) (5, 6) (X to 4) Rapid traverse backlash compensation value for each axis
3
(9) Parameters related to DI/DO (1/1) No.
0001#2 0001#5
Symbol
DCS DECI
Description
The signal from the START button on the MDI panel is routed/not routed via the machine. (X to 4) The deceleration signal for reference position return starts deceleration when this bit is set to 0/1. (5, 6) (X to 4) The override signal and rapid traverse override signal increase speed when this bit is set to 0/1. (5, 6) The start lock signal is common to all axes/defined for each axis. (X to 4) Acceptance time width for the M, S, or T function completion signal (G120#3 FIN) (5, 6) (X to 4) Time before the M, S, or T function code read signal is sent (5, 6) The interlock signal for each axis direction is invalid/valid. The PMC address for the GR1, GR2, and DRN signals is G0118/G0123. The PMC addresses for the *DEC3 and *DEC4 signals are GX19#7 and X19#5/G16#7 and G17#7. The rapid traverse override signals are ROV and ROV2/ROV1D, ROV2D, and ROV3D. The rewind inprogress signal (F164#6 RWD) is output only while the tape reader is being rewound/while programs in memory are being rewound. M, S, T, and B code processing is performed using an ordinary/highspeed interface. When output is started in background editing, the manual data input start signal (F150#5 DST) is output/is not output. The start lock signal is invalid/valid for manual feed. Position signal output grid number for each axis Reset signal extension time Position signal output grid width for each axis Distance to a contact surface for each axis
7001#5 0003#4
DECIS OVRI
7003#4 0008#7 0009#0 to #3
OVRIS EILK TFIN
7009#0 to #3 0009#4 to #7 7009#4 to #7 0024#7 0031#5 0038#0
TFIN TMF TMF EDILK ADDCF DEC34
0041#3 0045#2
ROVC RWDOUT
0045#7 0070#4
HSIF DSTBGE
10
0394#6 0113, 0114 0252 0713, 0714 0743 to 0746
POSILK
218
9. PARAMETERS
For T series
(10) Parameters related to CRT/MDI, display, and editing (1/3) No.

0001#1 0002#1 7002#1 0010#1 0011#7 0013#4 0014#2 0015#0 0015#1
Symbol
PROD PPD PPDS EBCL MCINP INHMN STDP CBLNK NWCH
Description
Tool length compensation data is included/is not included in relative coordinate display. Relative coordinates are not preset/are preset by coordinate system setting. When programs stored in memory are displayed, the EOB code is displayed using ;/:. Programs are not stored/are stored in memory with G117#0 MINP. Menu display is performed/not performed. The actual speed of the spindle, S codes, and T codes are not displayed/are displayed. The cursor blinks/does not blink. When tool wear compensation values are displayed, the character W is displayed/is not displayed. If the same program number is already contained in memory when programs are registered via the reader/punch interface, an alarm is issued/the program is replaced. The type of editing using the standard keyboard is edit operation A/B. When a program is registered, M02, M30, or M99 ends/does not end registration. When the diagnostic screen is displayed, timer and counter data are displayed in binary/decimal. Display language setting On the program check screen, relative/absolute coordinates are displayed. Actual speed is not displayed/is displayed. In MDI operation B, the modal state is not displayed/is displayed. The current position of the third/fourth axis is not displayed/is displayed. The fifth/sixth axis is not displayed/is displayed on the absolute/relative position display screen. The keyboard of the CRT unit or MDI panel employs the standard keys/full keypad. Program names are not displayed/are displayed in the program directory. The program directory is displayed in the order of program registration/in the ascending order of program numbers. During external control of input/output units, read operation follows the specification of No. 0015#6 REP/registration is performed after deletion of all programs. In reading via the reader/punch interface, all programs are registered/only the first program is registered. Soft keys are displayed and controlled according to the additional option function specification/regardless of the additional option function specification.
0015#6
REP
0018#7 0019#6 0019#7
EDITB NEOP DBCD
0023#0 to #6 0028#0 0028#2 0028#3 0029#0, #1 0029#6 0038#3 0040#0 0040#4
::::
PRCPOS DACTF MMDL DSP: DSPSUB FLKY NAMPR SORT
0045#0
RDL
0045#1
RAL
0048#7
SFFDSP
219

0050#1 0056#0
Symbol
NOFMK NOCND
Description
In sequence number search, a format check is performed/is not performed. When the part program storage length is 120 m/320 m, or when the background edit function is provided, automatic memory compression is performed/is not performed. The MMC/CNC screen is displayed when the power is turned on. When an alarm is issued on the CNC during MMC screen display, the MMC/CNC screen is displayed. When a system alarm is issued on the CNC during MMC screen display, the MMC/CNC screen is displayed. Addresses are not displayed/are displayed on the diagnostic screen. Dynamic ladder display is not performed/is performed. When the 14inch CRT unit is used, the diagnostic screen is displayed in the 9inch/14inch format. Operating monitor display is invalid/valid. The display and search operations are disabled/ enabled for protected programs. When the 9inch highresolution CRT unit is used, a monochrome/color display is used. For current position display using absolute and relative coordinates, the seventh and eighth axes are not displayed/are displayed. Output system/input system for machine coordinate display For automatic coordinate system setting based on inch input, No. 0708 and up/No. 0815 and up are used. For relative coordinate presetting, the relative coordinates are cleared to 0/preset to arbitrary values. For relative coordinate presetting, the standard specification is used/axis selection is performed using numeric keys. On the diagnostic screen, I/O link and extended R/D area DI/DO display are not provided/are provided. When an alarm is issued or an operator message is entered, the screen display switches/does not switch to the alarm screen or message screen. On the overall current position screen, the fifth and sixth axes are not displayed/are displayed. NC program input and output operations can be stopped by resetting the NC/only by selecting the [STOP] soft key. Servo waveform display is invalid/valid. MDI key processing is/is not highspeed. Input of a tool wear compensation value through the MDI keys is not prohibited/is prohibited.
0057#0 0057#1
PWNNC ALMNC
0057#2
SALNC
0060#0 0060#2 0060#3
DADRDP LDDSPG C14DGN
0060#5 0060#6 0060#7 0061#6
OPMNDP EXTSP IGNCOL DSP78
0063#0 0063#1
MTDSPI PRSTIN
0064#0
SETREL
0064#1
ALLPRE
0064#3
IOMDGN
0064#5
NPA
0066#0 0076#2
ALL56 IOP
10
0077#2 0077#6 0078#0
SGP HLKEY NOINOW
220
9. PARAMETERS
For T series

0078#1
Symbol
NOINOG
Description
Input of a tool geometry compensation value through the MDI keys is not prohibited/is prohibited. Input of macro variables through the MDI keys is not prohibited/is prohibited. Input of an offset from the workpiece reference point through the MDI keys is not prohibited/is prohibited. The servo setting screen is displayed/is not displayed. In the automatic operation activation state/automatic operation stop state, input of an offset from the workpiece reference point through the MDI keys is not prohibited/is prohibited. When PWE=0, PMC parameter input is prohibited/is not prohibited. On the parameter, diagnostic, and offset screens, onecharacter cancellation using the CAN key is disabled/enabled. On the offset screen, the cursor position is not preserved/is preserved. The details of alarm 409 are not displayed/are displayed. Tool post name (first to seventh characters) displayed on the screen Axis name subscript for each axis Title character code NC name character code Incremental value for automatic sequence number insertion Password Key
0078#2 0078#3
NOINMV NOINWZ
0389#0 0393#2
SRVSET WKNMDI
0393#7 0394#7
DGNWEB CAKEY
0395#1 0397#7 0257 to 0263 0264 to 0267 0337 to 0346 0351 to 0355 0550 0797 0798
TLSCUR SERNAI
(11) Parameters related to programs (1/2) No.

0010#4 0011#6 0015#7 0016#3 0016#5 0019#5 0028#4 0029#4 0030#7 0032#5
Symbol
PRG9 G01 CPRD NPRD SPAG M02NR EXTS ADRC G91 BLIN
Description
The editing of subprograms O9000 to O9999 is not prohibited/is prohibited. Upon powerup, the G00/G01 mode is set. When the decimal point is omitted, the least input increment/mm, inch, deg, or sec unit is used. The decimal point input and display function is used/is not used. An angle for direct drawing dimension programming is specified by angle/supplementary angle. After M02 is executed, control returns/does not return to the start of the program. External workpiece number search/external program number search As a chamfering or corner R address, C or R/,C or ,R is used. Upon powerup, the G90/G91 mode is set. For B 8digit input, 1.000 is always used/1.000 (millimeter) or 1.0000 (inch) is used.
221
(11) Parameters related to programs (2/2) No.

0036#1 0036#5 0040#2 0040#5 0045#6
Symbol
GSP GSPC MAPS TMCR CLER
Description
The G code system is of type A/type B. The G code system is of type B (A)/type C. Address Q for the pass point signal output function cannot be used/can be used. The T code is for a tool function/for calling O9000. The reset button, external reset signal, and emergency stop operation set the reset state/clear state. Upon reset, MDIB programs are not cleared/are cleared. M198 address P specifies a file number/program number. One block can contain only one M code/up to three M codes. The editing of subprograms O8000 to O8999 is not prohibited/is prohibited. When the clear state is entered, certain G codes are cleared/are not cleared. The specification of a threedigit M code is valid/ invalid. When circular interpolation is specified, the difference between the radius at the start point and the radius at the end point is not checked/is checked. In the feed per rotation mode, a dwell command is specified by time/spindle speed. If an EOR is read without reading a program end code, an alarm is issued/the reset state is set. M code which performs no buffering Third digit (hundreds digit) of a wait M code M code for calling programs stored in a file Program number for parameters/macro variables/diagnostic data M code for specifying spindle orientation M code for canceling spindle indexing Initial value of an M code used for spindle indexing Arc radius error limit
0057#7 0063#2 0065#7 0389#2 0391#7 0393#3 0393#6
MBCLR M198P M3B PRG8 NOCLR M3RQNG RADCHK
0395#0 0396#7 0111, 0112 0243 0248 0554 0587 0588 0589 0876
DLG99 EORRE
9
(12) Parameters related to pitch error compensation (1/1) No.
0011#0, #1 7011#0, #1 0756 to 0759 7713, 7714 1000 to 6000 1001 to 6128
Symbol
PML: PML:S
Description
(X to 4) Pitch error compensation magnification (5, 6) (X to 4) Compensation interval in pitch error compensation for each axis (5, 6) Zero position for pitch error compensation for each axis Pitch error compensation for each axis
10
222
9. PARAMETERS
0003#6, #7 0064#6, #7 0013#5 0013#6, #7 0024#2 0028#7 0031#0 0031#1 0049#0 0049#2 0062#3 0065#1
For T series
Symbol
PSG: P2SG: ORCW TCW, CWM SCTO PNOSMP SNRL SDRT EVSF CHKSP SPMRPM CZRN
Description
Gear ratio between the spindle and position coder Gear ratio between the spindle and second position coder In orientation, S analog output is positive/negative. Sign of S analog output The spindle speed arrival signal (G120#4 SAR) is not checked/is checked. The number of sampling operations for finding the average spindle speed is 4/1. Upon reset, the spindle indexing mode is not canceled/is canceled. The direction of spindle indexing with an M code is positive/negative. When an S code is specified, the S code and SF are not output/are output at all times. When SIND=1, spindle speed fluctuation detection is disabled/enabled. The unit of parameter data for spindle speed control is 1/10 [RPM]. The first G00 command after the mode is switched to the Cs contour control mode performs positioning after performing a reference position return/performs ordinary positioning. For D/A conversion, the analog interface board is not used/used. The multispindle control method is type A/type B. When a serial interface spindle is used, the position coder signal is received through an optical fiber/M27 connector. The sampling time for constant surface speed control remains unchanged from the conventional value/is the conventional value divided by 4. In multispindle control, the second axis is analog/serial. M27/the second spindle control unit is used for the second position coder. One/two serial interface spindles is/are connected. Serial interface spindles are not used/are used. A feedback pulse signal from a position coder represents an absolute value/is signed. For the first and second spindle motors, the spindle orientation function with the stop position set externally is not used/is used. During spindle synchronization, the rotation directions of the first and second spindle motors are the same as the specified sign/opposite to the specified sign. Spindle speed when the spindle rotates at a constant speed Delay timer used to check the spindle speed arrival signal (G120#4 SAR)
0070#0, #1 0070#3 0071#0
DAC: MSPDB ISRLPC
0071#1
HISSC
0071#2 0071#3 0071#4 0071#7 0074#7 0080#2, #3
SRLMSP SSMPC SRL2SP FSRSP PLCREV MORCM:
0080#6, #7
SP:NEG
0108 0110
223

0249 0303 0381#7 0397#0
Symbol
IGNSIC SPLME
Description
Magnification for spindle speed ratio control over serial interface spindles Permissible pulse error for phase synchronization in the synchronized control mode A serial/analog spindle is connected to tool post 2. The permissible rate and fluctuation rate of the spindle speed fluctuation detection function are 1 [%]/0.1 [%]. Data for gain adjustment in constant surface speed control (analog output) Permissible rate (Q) used in spindle speed fluctuation detection for determining whether a specified speed is reached Spindle speed fluctuation rate (R) used in spindle speed fluctuation detection for issuing an alarm Spindle speed offset value Speed when the spindle speed command voltage for each gear is 10 [V] Value for compensating for drift that occurred in a Csaxis servo loop Minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96) Maximum spindle speed for the constant surface speed control option Permissible speed fluctuation that does not cause an alarm to be issued in spindle speed fluctuation detection Permissible pulse error between two spindles in the spindle (simple) synchronized control mode Spindle servo loop gain multiplier in Csaxis control for each gear Spindle loop gain F0 feedrate for spindle rapid traverse override FL feedrate for spindle orientation M code for specifying spindle orientation M code for canceling spindle indexing Initial value of an M code used for spindle indexing Basic angular displacement for spindle indexing using an M code Data for second spindle gain adjustment in constant surface speed control Spindle speed offset value for the second spindle Speed when the second spindle speed command voltage for each gear is 10 [V] Data for third spindle gain adjustment in constant surface speed control Spindle speed offset value for the third spindle Speed when the third spindle speed command voltage for each gear is 10 [V] Time before a spindle speed fluctuation check is started
0516 0531
0532 0539 0540 to 0543 0546 0551 0556 0564
0576 0580 to 0583 0584 0585 0586 0587 0588 0589 0590 0613 0614 0615, 0616 0617 0618 0619, 0620 0712
10
224
9. PARAMETERS
6780 to 6783 6784 to 6787 6788 to 6791 6792 to 6795 6796 to 6799 7516 7539
For T series
Symbol

Description
Position loop gain of a servo axis in the Cs contour control mode (X) Position loop gain of a servo axis in the Cs contour control mode for each gear (Y) (Z) (4) Data for gain adjustment in subspindle S4/S5 digit control Subspindle speed offset value

0001#3 0001#4 0008#6 0010#5 0013#1
Symbol
TOC ORC NOFC DOFSI GOFU2
Description
In the reset state, offset vectors are not canceled/ are canceled. For offset values, a diameter value/radius value is specified. Offset values are loaded/are not loaded into a counter. Direct input of tool offset values is not performed/ is performed. A tool geometry compensation number is specified using the least significant/most significant digit of a T code. Tool geometry compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate system/by moving the tool. Tool geometry compensation is not canceled/is canceled by position number 0. A T code is specified using 4 digits/2 digits. Tool geometry compensation is not canceled/is canceled when the reset state is entered. Tool offsetting is performed in a block containing a T code/performed together with axis movement. A limit is not imposed/is imposed on tool offset setting. When a T code is specified using 2 digits, the upper 2 digits are assumed to be 00/are assumed to be the same as the lower 2 digits. In direct input of measurement values, the record button is not used/is used. When tool compensation measurement direct input function B is used, a tool compensation number is not selected/is selected automatically in the offset write mode. Yaxis offset is used with the fourth axis/third axis. A virtual tool tip number for tooltip radius compensation is specified using a geometric/wear compensation number. Tool compensation number when the tool compensation measurement value direct input B function is used
0013#2
GMOFS
0013#3 0014#0 0014#1 0014#4
GOFC T2D GMCL OFSB
0014#5 0014#6
WIGA T2T4
0015#4 0024#6
MORB QNI
0036#3 0075#3
YOF3 WNPT
0122
225

0395#4
Symbol
ADDLA
Description
During tooltip radius compensation, if two blocks specifying no movement are specified consecutively, the offset vector is assumed to be the vector perpendicular to the movement performed in the previous block at the end point/the intersection vector. Maximum ignorable travel distance along the outside of a corner in tooltip radius compensation Maximum tool wear compensation value in incremental input Maximum tool wear compensation value
0557
0728 0729

0031#2 0031#3 0031#4 0393#1
Symbol
TAPM ILVL RTCT MCQSCH
Description
In a tapping cycle, M03 or M04/M05 is output in the case of forward or reverse rotation. In a drilling cycle, the initial point is not updated/is updated when a reset occurs. The peck drilling cycle is type A/B. In a multiple repetitive canned cycle for lathes, a sequence number check with Q specified is not performed/is performed. In a multiple repetitive canned cycle for lathes, specification of a pocket figure is valid/invalid. Cut width in threading cycle G92/G76 M code for Caxis clamping in a drilling canned cycle M code for forward spindle rotation/reverse spindle rotation in a drilling canned cycle Dwell time used when Caxis unclamping is specified in a drilling cycle Retract dimension (d) used for peck drilling in a drilling cycle Depth of cut/retract dimension in the multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71, G72) Retract dimension for each axis in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G73) Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G73) Return distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycles (G74, G75) Number of times finishing is performed in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G76) Tool angle in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G76) Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G76) Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G76)
0393#4 0109 0204 0212, 0213 0591 0592 0717, 0718 0719, 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 0725 0726
CHKMRC
10
226
9. PARAMETERS
0029#3
For T series
Symbol
RGCTO
Description
In rigid tapping, the time constant for acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and tapping axis during withdraw are specified using the same parameter as for cutting/using a separate parameter. In rigid tapping, the rigid mode is canceled after/ before the rigid DI signal is turned off. Withdraw operation overriding is disabled/enabled. An arbitrary gear ratio is not used/is used between the spindle and position coder. G84 and G74 are not used/are used as G codes for rigid tapping. The feed hold and single block functions are enabled/disabled. In gear switching, the SIND signal is invalid/valid. Spindle backlash distance in rigid tapping M code for specifying the rigid tapping mode Override value for withdraw in rigid tapping Tapping axis inposition width in rigid tapping Spindle inposition width in rigid tapping Limit on position deviation during movement along the tapping axis Limit on position deviation during spindle movement Limit on position deviation while movement along the tapping axis is stopped Limit on position deviation while spindle movement is stopped Loop gain for position control over the spindle and tapping axis (for each gear) Spindle loop gain multiplier Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for the spindle and tapping axis Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for the spindle and tapping axis during withdraw Maximum allowable spindle speed during rigid tapping Number of teeth on the spindle side when an arbitrary gear ratio is used Number of teeth on the position coder side when an arbitrary gear ratio is used
0041#0 0063#4 0063#6 0076#3 0397#3 0399#5 0214 to 0217 0253 0254 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 to 0410 0411 to 0414 0415 to 0418 0419 to 0422 0423 to 0426 0427 to 0430 0431 to 0434 0435 0436 0473 0483
RGTPE RGDOV VSLPC G84RGD RGMFH SIG
Position deviation of the spindle during rigid tapping Amount of pulse distribution to the spindle during rigid tapping Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
227
(17) Parameters related to custom macros (1/1) No.

0011#5 0040#1
Symbol
SBKM DPOSUP
Description
A macro statement does not cause/causes a single block stop. When data is output with the DPRINT command, spaces are output/no particular operation is performed for leading zeros. The T code is for a tool function/ for calling O9000. Upon reset, common variables (#100 to #149) are placed/not placed in the null state. Upon reset, local variables (#01 to #33) are placed/not placed in the null state. Hole pattern corresponding to EIA code : Hole pattern corresponding to EIA code = Hole pattern corresponding to EIA code # Hole pattern corresponding to EIA code [ Hole pattern corresponding to EIA code ] When an interrupt is generated, absolute coordinates are not set/are set as skip coordinates. Custom macro interrupt type I/II The interrupt signal is based on the edge trigger method/status trigger method. M codes for enabling and disabling an interrupt are M96 and M97 respectively/determined by parameter setting. The local variables used for an interrupt are macro type/subprogram type. During cycle operation, the custom macro interrupt function is disabled/enabled. The custom macro interrupt function is disabled/ enabled. Upon completion of ISO code data output by B/D PRINT, an LF code/CR and LF codes are output. Number of macro variables common to tool posts G code for calling custom macros O9010 to O9019 M code for calling custom macros O9020 to O9029 M code for calling subprograms O9001 to O9003 M code for enabling custom macro interrupts M code for disabling custom macro interrupts M code for calling programs stored in a file
0040#5 0040#6 0040#7 0042 0043 0044 0053 0054 0056#1 0056#2 0056#3 0056#4
TMCR COMC LOCC ASTCD EQCD SHPCD LBLCD RBLCD MSKT MBLK MSTE MPRM
0056#5 0056#6 0056#7 0057#4 0218 0220 to 0229 0230 to 0239 0240 to 0242 0246 0247 0248
MSUB MCYL MUSR CROUT
(18) Parameters related to automatic tool compensation (1/1) No.

0558 0731, 0732 0733, 0734
10
Symbol

Description
Feedrate used for measurement in automatic tool compensation Value of g in automatic tool compensation Value of e in automatic tool compensation
228
9. PARAMETERS
(19) Parameters related to graphic display (1/1) No.
0024#3
For T series
Symbol
GNSR
Description
The actual position with tooltip radius compensation reflected is drawn/the programmed position is drawn. On the graphic display screen, the current position is not displayed/is displayed. Drawing coordinate system used with the graphic function Dot shift amount for 9inch highresolution graphic display
0046#5 0123 0630, 0631
GRPOS
(20) Parameters related to run time/parts count display (1/1) No.

0040#3
Symbol
RWCNT
Description
With M02 or M30, the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts is counted/is not counted. M code for counting the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts Number of required parts Total number of machined parts
0219 0600 0779
(21) Parameters related to tool life management (1/1) No.

0039#0, #1 0039#2 0039#3
Symbol
GST: LCTM TLSK
Description
Number of groups that can be registered in tool group setting Tool life is specified by a count/time. When the tool skip signal (G140#0 TLSKP) is applied, the group currently selected is skipped/the group number is also entered. When the tool skip signal (G140#0 TLSKP) is applied, the execution data of the group/execution data of all groups is cleared. The tool skip signal (G140#0 TLSKP) is accepted always/only when a tool subject to tool life management is being used. When multiple offset numbers are involved, counting is performed for each identical tool number/each tool. @ is prefixed/is not prefixed to a compensation number subject to tool life management. Offset number compensation value used with the simplified tool life management function Tool selection number compensation value used with the simplified tool life management function Maximum offset number used with the simplified tool life management function Maximum tool selection number used with the simplified tool life management function M code for restarting tool life count operation Tool life management ignore number
0039#4
GRST
0039#5
IGSK
0394#0
TLCSAM
0394#5 0117 0118 0119 0120 0336 0599
NOWOFS
229
(22) Parameters related to the position switch function (1/1) No.

0310 to 0319 0840 to 0849 0850 to 0859
Symbol

Description
Axis corresponding to a position switch Maximum position switch operation range Minimum position switch operation range
2
0002#5 0002#6 0013#0 0075#2
Symbol
HSLE TJHD JHD INHND
Description
When two manual pulse generators are installed, the axis selection signal is invalid/valid. In the TEACH IN JOG mode, a manual pulse generator is disabled/enabled. In the JOG mode, a manual pulse generator is disabled/enabled. The unit of manual handle interrupt movement is the output unit with acceleration/deceleration disabled/is the input unit with the acceleration/ deceleration enabled. When the handle of a manual pulse generator is turned quickly, the scale indication and travel distance may not match/the scale indication and travel distance match. For each axis, the direction of manual handle feed is the same/opposite. For each axis, the magnification (x 10000) of manual handle feed is used/is not used. Manual handle feed magnification (M) Manual handle feed magnification (specification B)
0077#4
HDLPM
0386#0 to #3 0386#4 to #7 0121 0699
HPNEG: HDPIG:
(24) Parameters related to the software operators panel (1/1) No.

0017#0 0017#1 0017#2
Symbol
OPG1 OPG2 OPG3
Description
On the software operators panel, mode selection is not performed/is performed. On the software operators panel, jog feed axis selection is not performed/is performed. On the software operators panel, manual pulse generator axis selection and magnification switching are not performed/are performed. On the software operators panel, jog feedrate override switching is not performed/is performed. On the software operators panel, BDT, SBK, MLK, and DRN switching is not performed/is performed. On the software operators panel, protect switching is not performed/is performed. On the software operators panel, feed hold switching is not performed/is performed. Jog feed axes and directions of the keys on the software operators panel Character codes of the generalpurpose switches on the software operators panel
0017#3 0017#4
OPG4 OPG5
10
0017#5 0017#6 0130 to 0137 0140 to 0203
OPG6 OPG7
230
9. PARAMETERS
(25) Parameters related to restarting programs (1/1) No.
0387#0 0124 to 0127
For T series
Symbol
SQDNC
Description
In DNC operation, program restarting is disabled/ enabled. Order of movement to program restart positions
(26) Parameters related to highspeed cycle machining/highspeed remote buffers (1/1) No.
0055#4 to #6 0597
Symbol
ITPCNT
Description
G05 data interpolation interval Number of highspeed remote buffer controlled axes
(27) Parameters related to PMCbased axis control (1/2) No.

0024#0 0032#4 7032#4 0032#6 0049#5 0052#0 to #7
Symbol
IGNPMC PNGMLK PNGMLKS EACSB EFML10 NODIC:
Description
PMCbased axis control is enabled/disabled. Machine locking along a PMC axis is enabled/ disabled. PMC axis control is based on specification A/B. A feedrate command (cutting feed) for PMC axis control is multiplied by 1/10. Current position display for PMC axis control follows the decimal point position based on the setting unit 1/10/follows the standard specifications. For each axis, group A/B of the DI and DO signals for PMC axis control (specification B) is used. Movement along a PMC controlled axis is added/ is not added to actual speed display. For PMC axes, the dry run and override functions are disabled/enabled. In PMCbased axis control, the same skip signal used with the CNC/a separate signal is used. Magnification of a feedrate for feedperrotation in PMC axis control In PMC axis control, the override signal increases speed when this bit is set to 0/1. In PMC axis control, the dry run function cannot/ can be used with a rapid traverse command. In PMC axis control, the dry run and override signals are the same as those used with the CNC/ separate dry run and override signals are used. A rapid traverse rate in PMC axis control is specified by the same parameter as with the CNC/specified by the feedrate data of an axis control command. Axis for which a feedrate is specified in PMC axis control (X to 8) Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed for a PMC axis (5, 6) (X to 8) FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed for a PMC axis (5, 6)
0061#0 to #5 0062#6 0063#5 7063#5 0066#3 0066#6, #7 0078#4 0078#6 0078#7
EBC: AXPCF EAXOV EAXOVS EPMSKP ERVF: OVRIE RDRNE EAXOVE
0387#7
EFERPD
0350 0651 to 0656
7651, 7652 0657 to 0662
7657, 7658
231
(27) Parameters related to PMCbased axis control (2/2) No.

0672 0685 0698 7021#6
Symbol
SUB1
Description
FL feedrate for reference position return operation along a PMC controlled axis F0 feedrate for independent rapid traverse override along a PMC controlled axis Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC controlled axis PMC axis control on the subCPU side is applied to the fifth and sixth axes/the fifth axis only.
(28) Parameters related to cylindrical grinding machines (FS0/00GCC) (1/1) No.

0033#0 to #3 0033#4 to #7 0034#0 to #3 0034#4 to #7 0035#0 to #3 0036#0 0036#1 0036#2
Symbol
P1S: P2S: P3S: P4S: DS: AGLST GSP ZRTM1
Description
The skip signal used with G31 P1 is invalid/valid. The skip signal used with G31 P2 is invalid/valid. The skip signal used with G31 P3 is invalid/valid. The skip signal used with G31 P4 is invalid/valid. The skip signal used with the dwell skip function is invalid/valid. Slanted axis control is not exercised/is exercised. The G code system is type A/type B. Movement is performed/is not performed along the Zaxis in manual reference position return operation along the Xaxis. Upon powerup, the feedperrotation mode/ feedperminute mode is set.
0036#4
G98
(29) Parameters related to the PMC (1/1) No.

0028#1 0060#1 0070#6 0071#6 0356 to 0359 0476 to 0479
7
Description
Symbol
PRCMSG PCLDB PEXRD DPCRAM
The program check screen displays the remaining travel distance/message from the PMC. The baud rate used for ladder loading is 4800 [bps]/9600 [bps]. The R and D areas of the PMCM are not expanded/are expanded. When a PMC RAM board is used, PMC LOAD MENU is displayed/is not displayed. Number of characters displayed in the remaining travel distance field on the program check screen Start PMC address where remaining travel distance field characters are set
10
232
9. PARAMETERS
For T series
(30) Parameters related to the butttype reference position setting function (1/1) No.
0372 to 0375 0451, 0458 0459 to 0462 0872 to 0875
Symbol

Description
Torque limit value during execution of a butttype reference position setting cycle Butting speed used when a butttype reference position setting cycle is executed Speed for reference position setting when a butt type reference position setting cycle is executed Reference position setting distance used when a butttype reference position setting cycle is executed
(31) Parameters related to the DNC (1/1) No.

0387#0 0390#7 0396#0 0396#2 0396#3 0347 0348 0365 0366 0368 0369 0370 0490
Symbol
SQDNC NODC3 BCC NCKER ERCODE
Description
In DNC operation, program restart is disabled/enabled. In DNC operation, reading is performed block by block/until the buffer becomes full. A BCC value check is performed/is not performed. An ER (RS232C) or TR (RS422) check is performed/is not performed. A 4digit hexadecimal error code is not added/is added to a negative acknowledgement. Mode of connection between the CNC and host when the DNC1 interface is used CNC station address when the DNC1 interface is used Timeout period for the noresponse timer Timeout period for the EOT signal timer Maximum invalid data count value Maximum number of message retransmissions due to NAK Maximum number of characters receivable after transmission termination processing Maximum datagram (data section) length
233
(32) Parameters related to the MNET (1/1) No.

0392#2 0392#4 0392#5 0392#7 0360 0361 0362 0363 0464 0465 0466 0467 0468
Symbol
SRL1 SRPE SREP SRS2
Description
The MNET character length is 7/8 bits. An MNET vertical parity check is not performed/ is performed. The MNET vertical parity is odd/even. The number of MNET stop bits is 1/2. MNET DI byte length MNET DO byte length MNET station address MNET baud rate Timer monitoring value after a connection preparation sequence for the local station is completed Polling time monitoring value for an ordinary sequence for the local station Timer monitoring value from start of SAI transmission to completion of BCC transmission Timer value from completion of reception to start of transmission Output destination address for the spindle orientation signal
(33) Parameters related to the Cfaxis (1/1) No.

0031#6 0031#7
Symbol
ESFC CNRST
Description
In the turning mode, a feedback pulse signal from a position detector is invalid/valid. In reference position return operation, a relative coordinate along the Cfaxis is not cleared/is cleared. The parameter unit for inch output is 0.1 [deg/ min]/1 [deg/min].
0032#7
ROT10
(34) Parameters related to 2path lathes (TT) (1/2) No.

0046#0 0046#1 0046#2 0047#0 0047#1 0047#2 0047#3 0047#4 0047#5, #6 0048#0, #1 0048#2
Symbol
RSTSW SBAB IGNAL TIST SP2C SEPH 2SP M3LMT VR: TY: ITO
Description
The reset key is enabled for both tool posts/only one selected tool post. On the common screen, tool post 2/tool post 1 is displayed on the upper side of the screen. When an alarm is issued on a tool post, the feed hold state is set/is not set. The tool post selection signal is valid/invalid. Graphic drawing is common to both tool posts/ varies for each tool post. Output destination of the manual handle pulse signal The number of spindles is 1/2. A wait M code is specified by No. 0243+100/Nos. 0243 to 999. Start number of custom macro variables common to tool posts Tool post coordinate system relationship Tool post interference check method
10
234
9. PARAMETERS
(34) Parameters related to 2path lathes (TT) (2/2) No.
0048#3 0048#4
For T series
Symbol
IFM IFE
Description
In the manual mode, a tool post interference check is not performed/is performed. A tool post interference check is performed/is not performed when satisfactory conditions are present. A tool post interference check along the Zaxis is performed/is not performed. PRDY is output with the timing specific to each tool post/simultaneously. Simultaneous feed per rotation and threading on both tool posts is impossible/is possible. A serial/analog spindle is connected to tool post 2. On tool post 2, Cfaxis and Yaxis control is not exercised/is exercised. On tool post 2, PMC axis control is not exercised/ is exercised. A serial spindle is not connected/is connected to tool post 2. On tool post 2, Csaxis control is not exercised/is exercised. On tool post 2, the part program storage length is not expanded/is expanded. Balance cut threading with one spindle on two tool posts is disabled/enabled. Balance cut override Number of macro variables common to tool posts Third digit (hundreds digit) of a wait M code Magnification for controlling the spindle speed ratio of serial interface spindles Tool post name (first to seventh characters) displayed on the screen Axis name subscript for each axis Minimum program number shared by the tool posts Coordinate system shift distance between the tool posts Distance between the reference point of tool post 1 and the reference point of tool post 2 for each axis
0048#5 0049#3 0075#1 0381#7 0383#6 0383#7 0384#6 0384#7 0385#7 0397#4 0397#5, #6 0218 0243 0249 0257 to 0263 0264 to 0267 0598 0730 0768, 0769
ZCLR WTRDY STHRD IGNSIC FE34 FEPA FESS FECS MEMEX SPCCK BOVR:
(35) Parameters related to polygon turning (1/2) No.

0069#0 0069#1 0069#2 0069#3
Symbol
PLGN3 PLGN4 PLG7 PLG8
Description
The third axis is not set/is set as a synchronized axis for polygon turning. The fourth axis is not set/is set as a synchronized axis for polygon turning. The seventh axis is not set/is set as a synchronized axis for polygon turning. The eighth axis is not set/is set as a synchronized axis for polygon turning.
235
(35) Parameters related to polygon turning (2/2) No.

0069#7
Symbol
PLHZ
Description
Reference position return operation along a synchronized axis with G28 is performed by rapid traverse/always at low speed. Maximum allowable speed of a synchronized axis Speed of a synchronized axis Jog feedrate when the rotary switch for a synchronized axis is positioned at 10 F0 feedrate for rapid traverse override of a synchronized axis FL feedrate for reference position return along a synchronized axis Travel distance per synchronized axis rotation
0667 0668 0669 0670 0671 0778
(36) Parameters related to synchronized control/axis recomposition (1/1) No.

0380#0 to #5 0380#6
Symbol
SMR: SPERR
Description
Synchronized control with mirror image on is not exercised/is exercised. An acceleration/deceleration difference is not added/is added to an outofsync distance in synchronized axis recomposition. Synchronized axis recomposition is canceled/is not canceled upon reset. If an excessive position deviation occurs in synchronized axis recomposition, an alarm is not issued/is issued. When parking is performed during synchronized axis recomposition, absolute and relative coordinates are not updated/are updated. When synchronized axis recomposition is started, a workpiece coordinate system is not set/is set automatically. At the end of synchronized axis recomposition, the workpiece coordinate system is not reset/is reset to the original one. Axis recomposition with mirror image on is not performed/is performed. Master axis with which each axis is synchronized Axis of tool post 1 for which the axis of tool post 2 is used to perform axis recomposition Limit on position deviation difference in synchronized control where each axis serves as a slave axis Position deviation difference in synchronized control where each axis serves as a slave axis Reference position coordinates in the coordinate system in axis recomposition for each axis
0380#7 0381#0 to #5
NRST SER:
0382#0 to #5
PKU:
0383#0 to #5
MPM:
0384#0 to #5
MPS:
0385#0 to #5 0320 to 0323 0326 to 0329 0686 to 0691
MCD:
0692 to 0697 0860 to 0865
10
236
10. ALARM LIST

(1) Program errors (P/S alarm) (a) M series Number
000 001
For M series
Message
PLEASE TURN OFF POWER TH PARITY ALARM TV PARITY ALARM TOO MANY DIGITS ADDRESS NOT FOUND NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN
Contents
A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is effective. Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.) A numeral or the sign was input without an address at the beginning of a block. Modify the program . The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB code. Modify the program. Sign input error (Sign was input after an address with which it cannot be used. Or two or more signs were input.) Modify the program. Decimal point . input error (A decimal point was input after an address with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.) Modify the program. Unusable character was input in significant area. Modify the program. An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified. Modify the program. Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program. In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental outputted by address K exceed the maximum command value or a command such that the lead becomes a negative value is given. Modify the program. An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the number of the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simultaneously. Alternatively, in a block where where the skip function activated by the torque limit reached signal (G31 P99/P98) was specified, either moving the machine along an axis was not specified, or moving the machine along multiple axes was specified. Specify movement only along one axis. In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 3410. An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
002
003
004
005
006
007
ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
009
ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT IMPROPER GCODE NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND
010
011
014
015
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED
020
OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS
021
ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED
237
Number
023
Message
ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10
Contents
In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was commanded for address R. Modify the program. In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction are commanded. Modify the program. The offset values specified by T code is too large. Modify the program. The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is tool large. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive. A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius compensation mode. Modify the program. The offset plane is switched in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. Modify the program. Chamfering or corner R was specified with a startup, a cancel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in canned cycle G90 or G94. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return command. Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program. Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program. The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01. Modify the program.
028
029
030
031
032
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 NO SOLUTION AT CRC NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT BLK CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN NRC INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR BLOCK CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN NRC
033
034
035
037
038
039
040
INTERFERENCE IN G90/G94 BLOCK INTERFERENCE IN NRC ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR
041
046
050
10
051
052
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR
238
10. ALARM LIST

Number
053
For M series
Contents
In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, K and R are specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma(,) is not C or R in direct drawing dimensions programming. Modify the program. A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program. In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the command for the block next to that for which only the angle is specified (A). In the chamfering comman, I(K) is commanded for the X(Z) axis. Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing programming. Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming. In an external program number search, a specified program number was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being edited in background processing. Check the program number and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting. Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number search. Check the sequence number. Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command. Modify the program. 1 The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or negative value. 2 The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value. 3 the negative value is specified to i or k is zero in G74 or G75. 4 A value other than zero is specified to address U or W, though i or k is zero in G74 or G75. 5 A negative value is specified to d, thoughthe relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined. 6. Zero or a negative value is specified to the height of thread or depth of cut of first time in G76. 7 The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height of thread. 8 An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76. Modify the program.
Message
TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS
054
NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/CNR MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/ CNR NO END POINT & ANGLE IN CHF/ CNR
055
056
057 058 059
NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END END POINT NOT FOUND PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND
060
SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUND IN G70G73 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G76
061
062
063
SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND SHAPE PROGRAM NOT MONOTONOUSLY
The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched. Modify the program. A target shape which cannot be made by monotonic machining was specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
064
239
Number
065
Message
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G73
Contents
1 G00 or G01 is not commanded at the block with the sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command. 2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, respectively. Modify the program.
066
IMPROPER G CODE IN G71G73 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE MORE THAN 10 POCKETS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED. FORMAT ERROR IN G70G73
An unallowable G code was commanded beween two blocks specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify the program. G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q. Modify the program. More than 10 pockets have been specified as type II in a G71 or G72 code.
067
068
4
the final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70, G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R. Modify the program. The memory area is insufficient. Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry. The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in program number search. Check the data. The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option), 200 (option), or 400 (option). Delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the program number. An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected. Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program. The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program. A program number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background processing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing. In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device.
069
070
NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY DATA NOT FOUND
071
072
TOO MANY PROGRAMS
073
PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE
074 075 076
ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER PROTECT ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR NUMBER NOT FOUND
077 078
10
079
PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR
240
10. ALARM LIST

Number
080
For M series
Contents
In the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37), the measurement position reach signal (XAE or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254 (value ). This is due to a setting or operator error. Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified without a T code. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program. T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program. In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the program. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off. Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective. The reference position return cannot be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference position return. Check the program contents. A manual return to the reference position was impossible because of the program being at pause. Press the reset button to cause a manual return. The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not return to the reference position. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual.
Message
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED
081
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 TCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37
082
083
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 COMMUNICATION ERROR
085
086
DR SIGNAL OFF
087
BUFFER OVERFLOW
090
REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE
091
MANUAL RETURN IMPOSSIBLE DURING PAUSE AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
092
094
095
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS CHG)
096
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS CHG)
241
Number
097
Message
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO EXEC) G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN
Contents
P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic operation. A command of the program restart was specified without the reference position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28 was found during search. Perform the reference position return. After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given with MDI. On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing enabled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system. The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit operation. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing <PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted. Register the deleted program. The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable range. Modify the program. The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is issued. 1047 to 1029, 0, 1029 to 1047 Modify the program. Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90) Modify the program. A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded. Modify the program. There is an error in other formats than <Formula>. Modify the program. A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom macro or in highspeed cycle machining. The header contents are improper. This alarm is given in the following cases: High speed cycle machining 1. The header corresponding to the specified machining cycle number called is not found. 2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range (0 999). 3. The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range (0 32767). 4. The start data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#20000 #85535). 5. The last storing data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#85535). 6. The storing start data variable number of executable format datais overlapped with the variable number used in the header. Modify the program.
098
099
MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. SEARCH PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY
100
101
110
DATA OVERFLOW
111
CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW
112
DIVIDED BY ZERO
113
IMPROPER COMMAND FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER
114
115
10
242
10. ALARM LIST

Number
116
For M series
Contents
The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited. Modify the program. The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple). Modify the program. The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument. Modify the program. The macro modal call is specified in double. Modify the program. Macro control command is used during DNC operation. Modify the program. DO END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program. <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program. In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program. NC and custom macro commands coexist. Modify the program. The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program. An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used. Modify the program. An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause. No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear. Check the PMC ladder diagram. Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram. Without any spindle orientation , an attept was made for spindle indexing. Perform spindle orientation. A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify the program. A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as Mcode related to spindle indexing. Modify the program. An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control. Modify the program.
Message
WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR ILLEGAL ARGUMENT
118
119
122 123
DUPLICATE MACRO MODALCALL CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC MISSING END STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION
124 125 126 127
128
129
130
131
TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE C/HCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK. MCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK. CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS
132
133
135
136
137
139
243
Number
145
Message
ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
Contents
The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation starts or it is canceled. 1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified. 2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 are incorrectly specified. Modify the value of program or parameter.
146
IMPROPER G CODE ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY TCODE NOT FOUND ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE MISMATCH WATING MCODE (TT only) COMMAND G68/G69 INDEPENDENTLY (TT only) ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA (TT only) ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND
G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode was specified. Modify the program. Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value. Modify the program. The tool group commanded in the machining program is not set. Modify the value of program or parameter. The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value registerable. Modify the number of tools. In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should be. Correct the program. In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not correspond to the group in use. Correct the program. P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set. Correct the program. The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable value. Modify the program. The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value. During executing a life data setting program, power was turned off. Set again. Diffrent M code is commanded in heads 1 and 2 as waiting M code. Modify the program. G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut. Modify the program. Incorrect tool figure data in interference check.
150
151
152
153
155
156
157 158 159
160
163
169
175
Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or cancel not correct. Modify the program.
10
244
10. ALARM LIST

Number
176
For M series
Contents
Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode was specified. 1) G codes for positioning: G28, G76, G81 G89, including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle 2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G50, G52 3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54G59 Modify the program.
Message
IMPROPER GCODE IN G107
177
CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE) G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING ERROR COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE
Check sum error Modify the program. G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode. Correct the program. The number of controlled axes set by the parameter (No. 597) exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value. Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of cables, parameters and I/O device. A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Csaxis control) mode, or rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchronous control mode is released in advance. The serial spindle control mode was not switched. Check the PMC ladder program. The program specified a movement along the Cfaxis when the signal CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the signal is not turned on. Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro. In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. The range for S values which can be specified in rigid tapping is set in parameter 5243. Change the setting in the parameter or modify the program. In the rigid tap, no F value is specified. Correct the program. In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is incorrect. Modify the program. In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code (M29) block and G84 (G74) block. Modify the program. Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 (G74) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is specified.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal (DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
178
179
180
194
195
SPINDLE CONTROL MODE SWITCH CAXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE MODE
197
199 200
MACRO WORD UNDEFINED ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND
201
FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP POSITION LSI OVERFLOW PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF
202 203
204
205
245
Number
210
Message
CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWED IN G99 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE DUPLICATE G251 (COMMANDS) NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN G251 COMMAND G250/G251 INDEPENDENTLY ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRMODE ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRMODE RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT SYNCHRONOUS/ MIXED CONTROL ERROR (TT only)
Contents
M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is executed in the DNC operation. Modify the program. G31 is commanded in the per revolution command when the highspeed skip option is provided. Modify the program. The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for the plane other than the ZX plane. Correct the program. Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled. Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program. G251 is further commanded in the G251 mode. Modify the program. P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the command value is out of the range. Modify the program. G251 and G250 are not independent blocks.
211
212
213
214
217 218
219
5
In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis. Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program. Not returned to reference point before cycle start. This alarm is generated in the following circumstances. (Searched for during synchronous and mixed control command. 1 When there is a mistake in axis number parameter setting. 2 When there is a mistake in control commanded. Modify the program or the parameter.
220
221
224 225
226
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE (TT only) CAN NOT KEEP SYNCHROSTATE (TT only)
A travel command has been sent to the axis being synchronized in synchronous mode. Modify the program or the parameter. This alarm is generated in the following circumstances. 1 When the synchro/mixed state could not be kept due to system overload. 2 The above condition occurred in CMC devices (hardware) and synchrostate could not be kept. (This alarm is not generated in normal use conditions.)
229
10
233
DEVICE BUSY
When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the RS232C interface, other users were using it.
246
10. ALARM LIST

(b) T series Number
000 001 002
For T series
Meaning
PLEASE TURN OFF POWER TH PARITY ALARM TV PARITY ALARM TOO MANY DIGITS ADDRESS NOT FOUND NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN
Contents and remedy

A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is effective. Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.) A numeral or the sign was input without an address at the beginning of a block. Modify the program . The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB code. Modify the program. Sign . input error (Sign was input after an address with which it cannot be used. Or two or more signs were input.) Modify the program. Decimal point input error (A decimal point was input after an address with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.) Modify the program. An attempt was made to execute EOR (%) because there was not M02, M30, or M99 at the end of the program. Correct the program. Unusable character was input in significant area. Modify the program. An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified. Modify the program. Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program. A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading / synchronous feed. The number of the commanded axes exceeded that of simultaneously controlled axes. In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 876. An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program. F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 digit column feed in circular interpolation. Modify the program. No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type C. Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset type C. Modify the program.
003
004
005
006
007
ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
008
ILLEGAL USE OF PROGRAM END ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT IMPROPER GCODE NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED CAN NOT COMMAND G95 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS
009
010
011
014 015 020
021
ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44
025
027
247
Number
028
Meaning
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10
Contents and remedy

In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction are commanded. Modify the program. The offset values specified by H code is too large. Modify the program. The offset number specified by D/H code for tool length offset or cutter compensation is too large. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive. A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation C. Modify the program. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in cutter compensation. Modify the program. G39 is commanded in cutter compensation B cancel mode or on the plane other than offset plane. Modify the program. Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode. Modify the program. G40 is commanded on the plane other than offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensation C mode. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter compensation mode. Modify the program. Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in cutter compensation. Modify the program. In the DRILLMATE, a T code was not specified together with the M06 code in a block. Alternatively, the Tcode was out of range. One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode. Modify the program. Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return command. Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program. Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program.
029
030
031
032
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 NO SOLUTION AT CRC NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT BLK CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC
033 034
035
036
037
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR BLOCK INTERFERENCE IN CRC
041
042 043
G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC ILLEGAL TCODE COMMAND G27G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR
044
10
046
050
051
248
10. ALARM LIST

Number
052 053
For T series
Contents and remedy
The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01. Modify the program. For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting, a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was followed by something other than R or C Correct the program. In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis is not in the selected plane. Correct the program. In an external program number search, a specified program number was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being edited in background processing. Check the program number and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting. Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number search. Check the sequence number. The memory area is insufficient. Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry. The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in program number search. Check the data. The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option) or, 200 (option). Delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the program number. Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program. A level larger than the maximum allowable nesting level of subprogram calls was specified. Modify the program. A program number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not found. An attempt was made to call a program being edited in the background processing mode. Correct the program. In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device.
Meaning
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS
055
MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/ CNR END POINT NOT FOUND PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND
058
059
060
SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY DATA NOT FOUND
070
071
072
TOO MANY PROGRAMS
073
PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE
074 076
ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR NUMBER NOT FOUND
077
078
079
PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR
249
Number
080
Meaning
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED
Contents and remedy

In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measurement position reach signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter (value ). This is due to a setting or operator error. Tool length automatic measurement (G37) was specified without a H code. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the program. H code and automatic tool compensation (G37) were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the program. In automatic tool length measurement, an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the program. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off. Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective. The reference position return cannot be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference position return. A manual return to the reference position was impossible because of the program being at pause. Press the reset button to cause a manual return. The commanded axis by G28 (automatic reference position return) or G27 (reference position return check) did not return to the reference position. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset amount changed.) P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount changed.)
081
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 HCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37
082
083
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 COMMUNICATION ERROR
085
086
DR SIGNAL OFF
087
BUFFER OVERFLOW
090
REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE
091
MANUAL RETURN IMPOSSIBLE DURING PAUSE AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
092
094
10
095
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS CHG) P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS CHG)
096
250
10. ALARM LIST

Number
097
For T series
Contents and remedy
P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic operation. A command of the program restart was specified without the reference position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28 was found during search. After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given with MDI. On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE (parameter writing enabled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system. The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit operation. When this alarm occurs, set the PWE parameter to 1, then switch on the power while holding down the <DELET> key. All programs will be deleted. The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable range. Modify the program. The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is issued. 1047 to 1029, 0, 1029 to 1047 Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90) A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded. Modify the program. Custom macro A specified an undefined H code in a G65 block. There is an error in other formats than <Formula>. Modify the program. A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom macro or in highspeed cycle machining. The header contents are improper. This alarm is given in the following cases: High speed cycle machining 1. The header corresponding to the specified machining cycle number called is not found. 2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range (0 999). 3. The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range (0 32767). 4. The start data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#20000 #85535). 5. The last storing data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range (#85535). 6. The storing start data variable number of executable format datais overlapped with the variable number used in the header. Modify the program.
Meaning
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO EXEC) G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. SEARCH PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY
098
099
100
101
110
DATA OVERFLOW
111
CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW DIVIDED BY ZERO IMPROPER COMMAND FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO
112 113
114
115
ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER
116
WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE
The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited. Modify the program.
251
Number
118
Meaning
PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR ILLEGAL ARGUMENT
Contents and remedy

The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple). Modify the program. The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument. Modify the program. The macro modal call is specified in double. Modify the program. Macro control command is used during DNC operation. Modify the program. DO END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program. Custom macro A specified an undefined H code in a G65 block. <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program. In DOn, 1x n the program. x 3 is not established. Modify
119
122 123
DUPLICATE MACRO MODALCALL CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC MISSING END STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO
124 125
126 127
ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION
NC and custom macro commands coexist. Modify the program. The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program. An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used. Modify the program. An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause. No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear. Check the PMC ladder diagram. Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram. The index table indexing positioning angle was instructed in other than an integral multiple of the value of the minimum angle. Modify the program. In index table indexing.Another control axis was instructed together with the B axis. Modify the program. An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control. Modify the program. G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode. Modify the program. Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 999999. Correct the scaling magnification setting .
128
129
130
131
TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG ILLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND
132
133
135
136
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC ILLEGAL SCALE RATE
10
139
141
142
252
10. ALARM LIST

Number
143
For T series
Contents and remedy
The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling mangification. The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane must be the same. Modify the program. Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714) Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value in the tool life management. Modify the program. The tool group of the tool life management commanded in the machining program is not set. Modify the value of program or parameter. The number of tools within one group in the tool life management exceeds the maximum value registerable. Modify the number of tools. In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should be. Correct the program. When the group is not commanded in the tool life management, H99 or D99 was commanded. Correct the program. In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not correspond to the tool life management group number in use. Correct the program. P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group of the tool life management is set. Correct the program. The number of tool groups in the tool life management to be set exceeds the maximum allowable value. Modify the program. The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value. During executing a life data setting program in tool life management, power was turned off. Set again. Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or cancel not correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, specify the command in a format of G07.1 rotationaxis name radius of cylinder. Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode was specified. 1) G codes for positioning: G28,, G73, G74, G76, G81 G89, including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle 2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G52,G92, 3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54G59 Modify the program.
Meaning
SCALED MOTION DATA OVERFLOW
144
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED ILLEGAL SETTING DATA ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY TCODE NOT FOUND NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06
148
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND
157
158 159
175
176
IMPROPER GCODE IN G107
177
CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE)
Check sum error is occurred in the highspeed remote buffer.
253
Number
178
Meaning
G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE PARAMETER SETTING ERROR COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) FORMAT ERROR IN G81 BLOCK
Contents and remedy

G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode. Correct the program. The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value. Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of cables, parameters and I/O device. G81 block format error (hobbing machine) 1) T (number of teeth) has not been instructed. 2) Data outside the command range was instructed by either T, L, Q or P. Modify the program.
179
180
181
182
G81 NOT COMMANDED
G83 (C axis servo lag quantity offset) was instructed though synchronization by G81 has not been instructed. Correct the program. (hobbing machine) G83 was instructed before canceled by G82 after compensating for the C axis servo lag quantity by G83. (hobbing machine) A command not to be instructed during synchronization by G81 was instructed. (hobbing machine) 1) A C axis command by G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, etc. was instructed. 2) Inch/Metric switching by G20, G21 was instructed.
183
DUPLICATE G83 (COMMANDS) ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G81
184
185
RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT PARAMETER SETTING ERROR
G81 was instructed without performing reference position return after power on or emergency stop. (hobbing machine) Perform reference position return. Parameter error regarding G81 (hobbing machine) 1) The C axis has not been set to be a rotary axis. 2) A hob axis and position coder gear ratio setting error
186
190
ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE SPINDLE CONTROL MODE SWITCH CAXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE MODE MACRO WORD UNDEFINED ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND
In the constant surface speed control, the specified axis command (P) contains an illegal value. Correct the program. Cs contour control or rigid tapping was specified during serial spindle synchronous control. Correct the program. The serial spindle control mode was not switched. Check the PMC ladder program. A command for Csaxis movement was issued when the current control mode is not serial spindle Cs contour control. Check the PMC ladder program or machining program. Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro. In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. Modify the program.
194
195
197
10
199 200
254
10. ALARM LIST

Number
201
For T series
Contents and remedy
In the rigid tap, no F value is specified. Correct the program. In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is incorrect. Modify the program. In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code (M29) block and G84 (G74) block. Modify the program. Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 (G74) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is specified.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal (DGNG061.1) is not turned on. Modify the program. Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode. Correct the program. M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is executed in the DNC operation. A highspeed skip (G31) was specified during the feedperrotation or rigid tapping mode. Correct the program. The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane including an additional axis. Correct the program. Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple synchronization control. 1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis. 2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis. 3) The program issued the automatic reference position return command without executing the manual reference position return after the power was turned on. 4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and slave axes exceeded the value specified in parameter .
Meaning
FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP POSITION LSI OVERFLOW PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF
202 203
204
205
206
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID TAP) CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 CAN NOT COMMAND HIGH SPEED SKIP ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE
210
211
212
213
214
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.EDIT RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT R CODE NOT FOUND
Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program. Input and output are executed at a time in the background edition. Execute a correct operation. Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic operation starts. Perform reference position return. The infeed quantity R has not been instructed for the G160 block of th ecanned grinding cycle. Or the R command value is negative. Correct the program. A tool change (M06) and a Zaxis movement were specified simultaneously in the DRILL MATE. Correct the program.
222
224
230
250
SIMULTANEOUS M06 AND ZAXIS MOVEMENT NOT ALLOWED
255
(2) Background edit alarm Number

???
Meaning
BACKGROUND EDIT ALARM SELECTED PROGRAM ALARM
Contents and remedy

BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.) It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being selected in the foreground. (Note) Use background editing correctly.
140
NOTE
A background editing alarm may occur even during MDI operationB. This is because MDI operationB uses the background editing function.
(3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm Number

3n0 3n1
Meaning
nthaxis origin return APC alarm: nthaxis communication APC alarm: nthaxis over time
Contents and remedy

Manual reference position return is required for the nthaxis. nthaxis APC communication error. Failure in data transmission Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis APC overtime error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis APC framing error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis APC parity error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis APC pulse error alarm. APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty. nthaxis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held. APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty. nthaxis axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the battery must be renewed. APC alarm. Replace the battery. nthaxis APC battery voltage has reached a level where the battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF). APC alarm.
3n2
3n3
APC alarm: nthaxis framing
3n4
APC alarm: nthaxis parity
3n5 3n6
APC alarm: nth axis pulse error APC alarm: nthaxis battery voltage 0 APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 1 APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 2
3n7
3n8
10
256
10. ALARM LIST

(4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse coder or cable. Number
3n9
Meaning
SPC ALARM: n AXIS PULSE CODER
Contents
The n axis (axis 18) pulse coder has a fault.
D The details of serial pulse coder alarm No.3n9 The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 3n9 are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 760 to 767, 770 to 777) as shown below. #7
760 to 767
#6
CSAL
#5
BLAL
#4
PHAL
#3
RCAL
#2
BZAL
#1
CKAL
#0
SPHL
CSAL : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. BLAL : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm (serial pulse coder alarm). SPHL : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable. RCAL : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. BZAL : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time. Make sure that the batteries are connected. Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference position return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm (serial pulse coder alarm). CKAL : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. PHAL : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. replace the serial pulse coder or cable. #7
770 to 777
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DTERR CRCERR STBERR
DTERR
: The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NCaxis board
CRCERR : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NCaxis board. STBERR : the serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NCaxis board.
257
(5) Servo alarms Number

400
Meaning
SERVO ALARM: 1, 2TH AXIS OVERLOAD SERVO ALARM: 1, 2TH AXIS VRDY OFF SERVO ALARM: 3, 4TH AXIS OVERLOAD SERVO ALARM: 3, 4TH AXIS VRDY OFF SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS VRDY ON
Contents and actions

1axis, 2axis overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No. 720 or 721 for details. 1axis, 2axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
401
2
3axis, 4axis overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No. 722 or 723 for details. 3axis, 4axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off. Even though the nth axis (axis 18) READY signal (MCON) went off, the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off. Check that the axis card and servo amplifierr are connected. Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual reference position return. 7axis, 8axis overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No. 726 or 727 for details. 3axis, 4axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off. The position deviation value when the nth axis stops is larger than the set value. Note) Limit value must be set to parameter for each axis. The position deviation value when the nth axis moves is larger than the set value. Note) Limit value must be set to parameter for each axis. The contents of the error register for the nth axis exceeded 231 power. This error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set parameters. Nth axis digital servo system fault. Refer to diagnosis display No. 720 and No.727 for details.
402
403
404
405
SERVO ALARM: ZERO POINT RETURN FAULT
406
SERVO ALARM: 7, 8TH AXIS OVER LOAD 7, 8TH AXIS VRDY OFF SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS EXCESS ERROR SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS EXCESS ERROR SERVO ALARM: nth AXIS LSI OVERFLOW SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS DETECTION RELATED ERROR SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS EXCESS SHIFT SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS DISCONNECTION
4n0
4n1
4n3
4n4
9
A speed higher than 4000000 units/s was attempted to be set in the nth axis. This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR. Position detection system fault in the nth axis pulse coder (disconnection alarm).
4n5
4n6
10
258
10. ALARM LIST

Number
4n7
Meaning
SERVO ALARM: n TH AXIS PARAMETER INCORRECT
Contents and actions

This alarm occurs when the nth axis is in one of the conditions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm) 1) The value set in Parameter No. 8n20 (motor form) is out of the specified limit. 2) A proper value (111 or 111) is not set in parameter No. 8n22 (motor revolution direction). 3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 8n23 (number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution). 4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 8n24 (number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution). 5) Parameters No. 8n84 and No. 8n85 (flexible field gear rate) have not been set. 6) An axis selection parameter (from No. 269 to 274) is incorrect. 7) An overflow occurred during parameter computation.
490
SERVO ALARM: 5TH AXIS OVER LOAD SERVO ALARM: 5, 6TH VRDY OFF SERVO ALARM: 5, 6TH AXIS VRDY ON
5axis, 6axis overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No. 724 or 725 for details. 5axis, 6axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off. The axis card ready signal (MCON) for axes 5 and 6 is off, but the servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) is not. Alternatively, when the power is applied, the DRDY is on, but the MCON is not. Ensure that the axis card and servo amplifier are connected. This is a position control circuit error. It is likely that a return to the reference position failed because of an error in the NC or the servo system. Retry a return to the reference position.
491 494
495
SERVO ALARM: 5, 6TH AXIS ZERO POINT RETURN
NOTE
If an excessive spindle error alarm occurs during rigid tapping, the relevant alarm number for the tapping feed axis is displayed.
259
D Details of servo alarm No.4n4 The detailed descriptions of servo alarm number 414 are displayed with diagnosis numbers 720 to 727 in the sequence of axis numbers. #7
720 to 727 OVL
#6
LV
#5
OVC
#4
HCAL
#3
HVA
#2
DCAL
#1
FBAL
#0
OFAL
OVL : An overload alarm is being generated. (This bit causes servo alarm No. 400, 402, 406, 490). LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED.
OVC : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. HCAL : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. HVAL : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. DCAL : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. FBAL : A disconnection alarm is being generated. (This bit causes servo alarm No.4n6.) OFAL : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. (6) Spindle alarms Number
408
Meaning
SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULT
Contents and remedy

This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the serial spindle. The four reasons can be considered as follows: 1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control units power is OFF. 2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other than SU01 or AL24 which are shown on the LED display of the spindle control unit. In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform startup again. 3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware) This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle control unit is activated.
409
SPINDLE ALARM DETECTION
A spindle amplifier alarm occurred in a system with a serial spindle. The alarm is indicated as ALXX (where XX is a number) on the display of the spindle amplifier. For details, see Section 14. Setting bit 7 of parameter No. 0397 causes the spindle amplifier alarm number to appear on the screen.
10
260
10. ALARM LIST

(7) Over travel alarms Number
5n0 5n1 5n2 5n3 5n4 5n5 5n4 5n5 520
Meaning
OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVERTRAVEL AT +N AXIS OVERTRAVEL AT N AXIS OVERTRAVEL AT ZAXIS TOOLPOST INTERFERENCE ALARM AT +XAXIS TOOLPOST INTERFERENCE ALARM AT XAXIS TOOLPOST INTERFERENCE ALARM AT +ZAXIS TOOLPOST INTERFERENCE ALARM AT ZAXIS
Contents and remedy

Exceeded the nth axis + side stored stroke limit 1, 2. Exceeded the nth axis side stored stroke limit 1, 2. Exceeded the nth axis + side stored stroke limit 3. Exceeded the nth axis side stored stroke limit 3. Exceeded the nth axis + side hardware OT. (for M series) Exceeded the nth axis side hardware OT. (for M series) The tool moved beyond stored stroke limit 4 in the positive direction of the n axis (for T series). The tool moved beyond stored stroke limit 4 in the negative direction of the n axis (for T series). The tool moved beyond the hardware overtravel position in the positive direction of the Zaxis (for T series). A toolpost interference alarm was issued while the tool was moving in the positive direction along the Xaxis. A toolpost interference alarm was issued while the tool was moving in the negative direction along the Xaxis. A toolpost interference alarm was issued while the tool was moving in the positive direction along the Zaxis. A toolpost interference alarm was issued while the tool was moving in the negative direction along the Zaxis.
590
591
592
593
(8) Macro alarms Number

500 to 599
Meaning
MACRO ALARM
Contents and remedy

This alarm is related to the custom macro, macro executor, or ordermade macro (including conversational program inputs). Refer to the relevant manual for details. (The macro alarm number may coincide with an overtravel alarm number. However, they can be distinguished from each other because the overtravel alarm number is accompanied with the description of the alarm.
261
(9) PMC alarms Number

600
Meaning
PMC ALARM : INVALID INSTRUCTION PMC ALARM : RAM PARITY PMC ALARM : SERIAL TRANSFER PMC ALARM WATCHDOG :
Contents and remedy

An invalidinstruction interrupt occurred in the PMC. A PMC RAM parity error occurred. A PMC serial transfer error occurred. A PMC watchdog timer alarm occurred. A PMC ROM parity error occurred. The maximum allowable number of PMC ladder program steps was exceeded. The assignment of I/O module signals is incorrect. An I/O link error occurred. The details are listed below.
601 602 603 604 605 606
PMC ALARM : ROM PARITY PMC ALARM OVER STEP :
PMC ALARM : I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT PMC ALARM : I/O LINK
607
Number
010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 130 140 160 * * *
Details of PMC alarm (No. 607)

Communication error (SLC (master) internal register error) An SLC RAM bit error occurred (verification error). An SLC RAM bit error occurred (verification error).
No I/O unit has been connected. 32 or more I/O units are connected. * * * Data transmission error (no response from the slave) Communication error (no response from the slave) Communication error (no response from the slave)
An NMI (for other than alarm codes 110 to 160) occurred. * * * An SLC (master) RAM parity error occurred (detected by hardware). An SLC (slave) RAM parity error occurred (detected by hardware). SLC (slave) communication error * AL0 : Watchdog timer DO clear signal received * IR1 : CRC or framing error Watchdog timer alarm Parity error
9
Hardware errors are indicated with an asterisk (*). (10) Overheat alarms Number
700
Meaning
OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT SPINDLE HEAT OVER-
Contents and remedy

Control unit overheat Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter. Spindle overheat was detected by the spindle speed fluctuation detection function (for T series). Check the machining conditions.
10
704
262
10. ALARM LIST

(11) MNET alarm Number
899
Meaning
MNET INTERFACE ALARM
Contents and remedy

This alarm is related to a serial interface for an external PLC. The details are listed below.
Number
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0257 0258 0259 Others
Details of MNET alarm (No. 899)

Abnormal character (character other than transmission codes) received EXT code error Connection time monitor error (parameter No. 0464) Polling time monitor error (parameter No. 0465) Vertical parity or framing error detected Transmission timeout error (parameter No. 0466) ROM parity error Overrun error detected CPU interrupt detected
(12) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.) Number
910 911 912
Meaning
MAIN RAM PARITY MAIN RAM PARITY SHARED PARITY SHARED PARITY SERVO RAM PARITY LADDER EDITING CASSETTE RAM PARITY LADDER EDITING CASSETTE RAM PARITY WATCHDOG ALARM SUB CPU WATCHDOG ALARM RAM
Contents and remedy

This RAM parity error is related to loworder bytes. Replace the memory PC board. This RAM parity error is related to highorder bytes. Replace the memory PC board. This parity error is related to loworder bytes of RAM shared with the digital servo circuit. Replace the axis control PC board. This parity error is related to highorder bytes of RAM shared with the digital servo circuit. Replace the axis control PC board. This is a local RAM parity error in the digital servo circuit. Replace the axis control PC board. This RAM parity error is related to loworder bytes of the ladder editing cassette. Replace the ladder editing cassette. This RAM parity error is related to highorder bytes of the ladder editing cassette. Replace the ladder editing cassette. This is a watchdog timer alarm or a servo system alarm for axis 1 to 4. Replace the master or axis control PC board. This is a watchdog timer alarm related to the subCPU board or a servo system alarm for axis 5 or 6. Replace the subCPU board or the axis5/6 control PC board. This is a servo system alarm related to axis 7 or 8. Replace the axis7/8 control PC board. This is a CPU error. Replace the master PC board. PC board installation is incorrect. Check the specification of the PC board. The memory PC board is not connected securely. Ensure that the PC board is connected securely.
913
RAM
914
915
916
920
921
922 930 940
7/8 AXIS SERVO SYSTEM ALARM CPU ERROR PC BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR MEMORY PC BOARD CONNECTION ERROR
941
263
Number
945
Meaning
SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR
Contents and remedy

The hardware configuration is incorrect for the serial spindle, or a communication alarm occurred. Check the hardware configuration of the spindle. Also ensure that the hardware for the serial spindle is connected securely. Communication is impossible with the second serial spindle. Ensure that the second serial spindle is connected securely. A fuse has blown. Replace the fuse (+24E; F14). This is a subCPU error. Replace the subCPU PC board. This is a ROM parity error. Replace the ROM board in which the error occurred.
946
SECOND SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR FUSE ALARM BLOWN
950 960 998
SUB CPU ERROR ROM PARITY
(13) External alarm Number

1000
4
Contents and remedy
This alarm was detected by the PMC ladder program. Refer to the relevant manual from the machine builder for details.
Meaning
EXTERNAL ALARM
5
(14) Alarms Displayed on spindle Servo Unit Alarm No.
A display AL01
Meaning
Program ROM abnormality (not installed) Motor overheat
Description
Detects that control program is not started (due to program ROM not installed, etc.) Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed excessively.
Remedy
Install normal program ROM Check status. Cool then alarm. load motor reset
AL02
Excessive deviation
speed
Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed excessively. Detects that fuse F4 in DC link section is blown (models 30S and 40S). Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open phase or momentary failure of power (models 30S and 40S).
Check load status. Reset alarm. Check power transistors, and so forth. Replace fuse. Replace fuse. Check open phase and power supply refenerative circuit operation. Check for control power supply short circuit . Replace fuse. Reset alarm.
AL03
DC link section fuse blown
AL04
Input fuse blown. Input power open phase.
AL05
Control power supply fuse blown
Detects that control power supply fuse AF2 or AF3 is blown (models 30S and 40S).
10
AL07
Excessive speed
Detects that motor rotation has exceeded 115% of its rated speed. Detects that switch is flipped to 200 VAC when input voltage is 230 VAC or higher (models 30S and 40S).
AL08
High input voltage
Flip switch to 230 VAC.
264
10. ALARM LIST

Alarm No.
AL09
Meaning
Excessive load on main circuit section Low input voltage
Description
Detects abnormal temperature rise of power transistor radiator. Detects drop in input power supply voltage. Detects abnormally high direct current power supply voltage in power circuit section. Detects flow of abnormally large current in direct current section of power cirtcuit Detects abnormality in CPU internal data memory. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects incorrect switch sequence in spindle switch/output switch operation. Detects abnormality in RAM for external data. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects program ROM data error.This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects excessive U phase current detection ciucuit offset. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects excessive V phase current detection circuit offset. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects serial transfer data error (such as NC power supply turned off, etc.) Detects that serial data transfer has stopped. Detects abnormality in position coder signal(such as unconnected cable and parameter setting error). Detects abnormality in position coder signal (such as unconnected cable and adjustment error). Detects abnormality in position detection signal for Cs contouring control (such as unconnected cable and adjustment error). Detects that overload has been continuously applied for some period of time (such as restraining motor shaft in positioning).
Remedy
Cool radiator then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Check quence. se-
AL10
AL11
Overvoltage in DC link section Overcurrent in DC link section CPU internal data memory abnormality Spindle switch/output switch alarm RAM abnormality
AL12
AL13
AL15
AL16
Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm.
AL18
Program ROM sum check error Excessive U phase current detection circuit offset
AL19
AL20
Excessive V phase current detection circuit offset
Remove cause, then reset alarm.
AL24
Serial transfer data error Serial data transfer stopped Disconnection of speed detection signal for Cs contouring control Position coder signal disconnection
Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm.
AL25
AL26
AL27
AL28
Disconnection of position detection signal for Cs contouring control Shorttime load over-
AL29
265
Alarm No.
AL30
Meaning
Input circuit overcurrent Speed detection signal disconnection motor restraint alarm or motor is clamped.
Description
Detects overcurrent flowing in input circuit. Detects that motor cannot rotate at specified speed or it is detected that the motor is clamped. (but rotates at very slow speed or has stopped). (This includes checking of speed detection signal cable.) Detects abnormality in RAM internalto LSI for serial data transfer. This check is made only when power is turned on.
Remedy
Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm.
AL31
AL32
Abnormality in RAM internal to LSI for serial data transfer. This check is made only when power is turned on.
AL33
Insufficient DC link section charging
Detects insuffieient charging of direct current power supply voltage in power circuit section when magnetic contactor in amplifier is turned on (such as open phase and defectifve charging resistor). Detects parameter data set beyond allowable range of values. Detects gear ratio data set beyond allowable range of values. Detects error counter overflow. Detects incorrect setting of parameter for number of speed detection pulses. Detects 1rotaion signal detection failure in Cs contouring contorl.
5
Set data. Set data. correct
AL34
Parameter data setting beyond allowable range of values Excesive gear ratio data setting Error counter over flow Speed detector parameter setting error Alarm for indicating failure in detecting 1rotation signal for Cs contouring control Alarm for indicating 1rotation signal for Cs contouring control not detected Alarm for indicating failure in detecting position coder 1rotaion signal.
AL35
correct
AL36
Correct cause, then reset alarm. Set data. correct
AL37
AL39
Make 1rotaion signal adjustment. Check cable shield status. Make 1rotaion signal adjustment.
AL40
Detects that 1rotation signal has not occurred in Cs contouring control. Detects failure in detecting position coder 1rotation signal.
9
Make signal adjustment for signal conversion circuit. Check cable shield status. Make 1rotation signal adjustment for signal conversion circuit.
AL41
10
AL42
Alarm for indicating position coder 1rotation signal not detected
Detects that position coder 1rotation signal has not issued.
266
10. ALARM LIST

Alarm No.
AL43
Meaning
Alarm for indicating disconnection of position coder signal for differential speed mode Alarm for indicating failure in detecting position coder 1rotation signal in thread cutting operation. Position coder signal abnormality
Description
Detects that main spindle position coder signal used for differential speed mode is not connected yet (or is disconnected). Detects failure in detecting position coder 1rotation signasl in thread cutting operation.
Remedy
Check that main spindle position coder signal is connected to connector CN12. Make 1rotation signal adjustment for signal conversion circuit Check cable shield status. Make signal adjustment for signal conversion circuit. Check cable shield status. Make 1rotation signal adjustment for signal conversion circuit. Check the position coder state of the other side. Check parameters such as a position gain.
AL46
AL47
Detects incorrect position coder signal count operation.
AL48
Position 1rotation abnormailty
coder signal
Detects that occurrence of position coder 1rotation signal has stopped.
AL49
The converted differential speed is too high.
Detects that speed of other spindle converted to speed of local spindle has exceeded allowable limit in differential mode. Detects that speed command calculation value exceeded allowable range in spindle synchronization control. Detects that DC power supply voltage of power ciucuit has dropped (due to momentary power failure or loose contact of magnetic contactor). Detects abnormality in synchronization signal (ITP signal )with CNC (such as loss of ITP signal). Detects abnormality in synchronization signal (ITP signal) with CNC (such as loss of ITP signal).
AL50
Excessive speed command calculation value in spindle synchronization control Undervoltage at DC link section
AL51
AL52
ITP signal abnormality I
Remove cause, then reset alarm. Remove cause, then reset alarm.
AL53
ITP signal abnormality II
267
Alarm No.
AL54
Meaning
Overload alarm current
Description
Detects that excessive current flowed in motor for long time.
Remedy
Check if overload operation or frequent acceleration/deceleration is performed. Check operation of magnetic contractor for power line switching. Check if power line status check signal is processed normally.
AL55
Power line abnormality in spindle switching/output switching
Detects that switch request signal does not match power line status check signal.
10
268
11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY

Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key
Name
RESET key
English key
RESET
Symbolic key
2
PAGE UP key
PAGE
PAGE DOWN key
PAGE
3
SHIFT key
SHIFT
POSITION key
POS
PROGRAM key
PRGRM
MENU key
MENU
OFFSET key
OFSET
MENU/OFFSET key
MENU OFSET
DIAGNOS/PARAM key
DGNOS PARAM
7
OPRATION/ALARM key
OPR
ALARM
AUXILIARY/GRAPHIC key
AUX GRAPH
MACRO key
MACRO
ALTER key
ALTER
INSERT key
INSRT
INPUT key
INPUT
10
OUTPUT/START key
OUTPT START
11
DELETE key
DELET
CANCEL key
CAN
269

FANUC 0-Mate PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC 0-Mate PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC 0-Mate PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different types of keyboards mentioned in the manual?

What are the different types of keyboards mentioned in the manual?

What do the alarm codes AL-42 to AL-55 indicate?

What do the alarm codes AL-42 to AL-55 indicate?

FANUC Series 0 / 00 / 0-Mate

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK

Program edit keys

Page change keys Cursor move keys

Function keys Shift key

MMC/CNC change key Reset key Shift key

Program edit keys

Full MDI keyboards (T series)

Standard MDI keyboards (M series)

Full MDI keyboards (M series)

MDI keyboards with MMC

f OFF 2 RESET key

| ON Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.

Soft keys (option)

(Full MDI keyboard) 7 INPUT key

This key is also used to input data from an input/output device.

Program edit keys

Press these keys when editing the program.

Press these keys to switch display screens for each function.

Cursor move keys

Page change keys

MMC/CNC change key MMC/ CNC

For full MDI keyboard

Key input buffer display

POSITION DISPLAY SCREEN

Current position screen

Position display of absolute coordinate system

Position displays of relative coordinate system

Manual handle interruption

Display of run time and parts count Display of actual speed

Display of run time and parts count

Display of run time and parts count Display of actual speed

Display of actual speed

Display of actual speed

Setting of relative coordinate values

Display of program contents

Display of current block and modal data

Display of current block and next block

Displayed in MDI mode Not displayed in MDI mode

Program screen AUTO BGEDT FL.SDL *2

[SCHDUL] Back ground editing screen Setting of schedule

Screen transition triggered by the function key in the EDIT mode

Program editing screen

Display of program directory on CNC memory Condense of CNC memory

Display of program directory on floppy cassette

Conversational programming screen

Program screen EDIT BGEDT EXEDT

Back ground editing screen

Extended part program editing

Screen transition triggered by the function key (M series)

Display of tool offset value

Display of custom macro variables

Display of pattern menu

Display of workpiece zero point offset value